JP6206550B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out when a gaming ball has entered a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area. In addition, when a game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and a picture is displayed on a display device provided in the game area. The change display of is started. When the lottery is won, for example, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. In the specific gaming state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the gaming area is executed, and paying out of gaming balls according to the number of balls entering the variable pitching device is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-35977 A

  Here, in the above-exemplified gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The present invention
A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Based on the first specific opportunity predetermined before Symbol first variable ball entrance control means for executing a first variable ball entrance control for switching the first variable ball entrance unit to the closed state after said open state,
First privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable pitching means;
A second variable entry means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
On the basis of a predetermined second specific trigger, second variable entry control means for executing second variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the second variable entry means is in the open state;
Second privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on a game ball entering the second variable pitching means;
In the gaming machine, which is equipped with a,
Before Symbol first variable ball entrance control means
As the predetermined first variable ball entrance control, before Symbol first variable ball entrance means, controlled as expectations of the incoming balls into the first variable ball entrance means is operated at a relatively low low expectations embodiment First control means for
As the predetermined first variable entry control, the first variable entry means is operated in a high expectation mode in which the expectation degree of entering the first variable entry means is relatively high. Second control means that can be controlled in a period after the period in which the operation of the low expectation mode is performed by the first control means;
With
The second variable entry control means includes
As the predetermined second variable entry control, the second variable entry means is controlled so as to operate in a low expectation mode where the expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means is relatively low. Third control means;
As the predetermined second variable entry control, the second variable entry means is operated in a high expectation mode in which an expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means is relatively high. A fourth control means capable of controlling in a period later than a period in which the operation of the low expectation mode is performed by the third control means;
First notification means capable of performing notification corresponding to execution of the first variable entry control;
Second notification means capable of performing notification corresponding to execution of the second variable entry control;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) Explanatory drawing of the display part for accessories. (A) The front view which shows the 1st electrically-driven accessory and its periphery, (b) The front view which shows the 2nd electrically-driven accessory and its periphery. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a decoration design. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating various fluctuation | variation display time tables. The flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows a 1st electric role corresponding | compatible process. The flowchart which shows a 1st common figure change start process. The flowchart which shows a 1st electric role opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows a display error corresponding | compatible process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd electric power corresponding | compatible process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd common figure change start process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd electric utility opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows a 3rd electric power corresponding | compatible process. The timing chart for demonstrating the flow of a game. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing various productions. The flowchart which shows production control processing. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. The flowchart which shows an open command response process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation command response process. The timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the flow of a game and various effects. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode displayed on a display screen in various productions. (A) The front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, (b) The cross-sectional schematic diagram of a 1st variable winning device, (c) The cross-sectional schematic diagram of a 2nd variable winning device. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. (A) The flowchart which shows a 1st special figure fluctuation start process, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st table. (A) The flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure change start processing, (b-1) explanatory drawing for explaining the table for normal, (b-2) explanatory drawing for explaining the table for time reduction. The flowchart which shows an opening / closing execution command response process. The front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptic shape, and the window panel 22 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 22 is formed colorless and transparent with glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 21, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 23 is provided above the window part 21 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 23, speaker units 24 that output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 bulging toward the near side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 25a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 25, and a lower plate 26a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 26. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out from the payout device described later, and guides them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side (see FIG. 2) having a function of launching the game balls while aligning them in a row. It has a function. In addition, the lower tray 26a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 25a. The game balls paid out from the payout device of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25a and the lower plate 26a through the passage forming unit 28 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  On the front door frame 14, a firing handle 29 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. By operating the firing handle 29, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 provided below the game area in the inner frame toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 29, the launch strength of the game ball launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum is changed.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed at the center of the resin base 31. A game board 33 having a game area formed on the front side is detachably attached to the resin base 31. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 32 of the resin base 31.

  The structure of the game board 33 is demonstrated based on Fig.4 (a). FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 33.

  An inner rail portion 34 and an outer rail portion 35 are attached to the surface of the game board 33, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35. The inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35 constitute a guide ball 36 for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 when the player rotates the launch handle 29. Is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 36.

  The guide rail 36 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 29 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 36 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 36 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 33 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 40, a first electric winning port 41, a second electric winning port 42, a third electric winning port 43, a first through gate 51, a second through gate 52, and a third through gate. 53, a variable display unit 61, an accessory display 62, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 40 and each of the electric winning holes 41 to 43, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 33, and based on the detection result. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning port 40 and each of the electrical winning ports 41 to 43, 10 game balls are paid out.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of payouts is different between the second electric combination winning port 42 and the third electric combination winning port 43. In addition, the number of payouts of the first power combination winning port 41 may be smaller than the number of payouts of the second power combination winning port 42 and the third power combination winning port 43.

  In addition, an out port 63 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 63. Further, the game board 33 is provided with a large number of nails 64 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 63, the game balls to the general winning port 40, the electric service winning ports 41 to 43, and the through gates 51 to 53 are displayed. We refer to winning as winning.

  Each of the through gates 51 to 53 is fixed in a state in which a part thereof protrudes forward with respect to the board surface of the game board 33. The protruding portion is provided with a ball passage portion through which a game ball can pass from the upper side (upstream side) to the lower side (downstream side). The ball passage portion penetrates in the vertical direction and is formed larger than the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing from above the game area passes through the ball passage portion and flows directly downstream of the game area.

  In addition, each of the through gates 51 to 53 is provided with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that passes through the ball passing portion. The detection sensor is connected to a main controller described later, and the detection result of the detection sensor is output to the main controller.

  The positional relationship between the through gates 51 to 53 is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first through gate 51 is located at different positions through which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 fluctuates in the lateral direction, specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. And on the center line of both. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows through the region surrounded by the through gates 51 to 53, and according to the flow-down mode of the game ball in the region (the lateral fluctuation of the game ball). Thus, it can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  In addition, between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Thus, a plurality of guide nails 64a for guiding the game ball are provided. Each guide nail 64 a is disposed below the first through gate 51. The guide nails 64a are arranged side by side with a space smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is such that the game ball cannot pass between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. It is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

  According to such a configuration, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows down as it is, it collides with the guide nail 64a and is repelled, and either the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is hit. Guided. This makes it easier for the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  In this case, whether the game ball that collides with the guide nail 64a passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 differs depending on the collision mode between the game ball and the guide nail 64a. For this reason, it is random whether the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  In addition, although the relative positional relationship of the 2nd through gate 52 and the 3rd through gate 53 of the up-down direction is set identically, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure shifted | deviated to the up-down direction. However, from the viewpoint of randomness, a configuration in which the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction is set to be the same is better.

  Here, the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 via the first through gate 51 is configured to be higher than the frequency at which the game ball does not pass through the first through gate 51. ing. Specifically, a regulation nail 64b that regulates the flow-down mode of the game ball so that a game ball that passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 does not easily occur without passing through the first through gate 51. Is provided. The regulation nail 64 b is provided on a path other than the path through the first through gate 51 in the flow path of the game ball toward the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. The interval between the control nails 64b is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball flowing through the flow path through the first through gate 51 flows down in the space formed by the through gates 51 to 53 and the nails 64a and 64b, and the second through gate 52 or the second It is easy to pass through the 3 through gate 53. On the other hand, the game ball flowing through the flow-down path not passing through the first through gate 51 is bounced by the regulation nails 64 b, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  In addition, the distance between what is arrange | positioned in the lowermost part in the control nail 64b and the guide nail 64a is set larger than the diameter of a game ball. For this reason, an event may occur in which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each distance may be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the above-described event does not occur.

  An internal lottery is performed when a winning to each of the through gates 51 to 53 is detected. The lottery result of the internal lottery is displayed on the accessory display 62. The accessory display section 62 is provided on a decorative member 65 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 65 extends from the board surface of the game board 33 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 65 faces the window panel 22 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the front surface of the decorative member 65.

  An accessory display 62 is provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 65. In other words, the accessory display unit 62 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball falls in front of the accessory display unit 62. It is prevented. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 65, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 40 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  The accessory display 62 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a front view of the accessory display 62.

  The accessory display section 62 is formed with a display area 70 in which a lottery result of an internal lottery performed based on winnings to the through gates 51 to 53 is clearly shown. The display area 70 is divided into three unit areas 71 to 73 in the vertical direction, and the unit areas 71 to 73 and the through gates 51 to 53 correspond one-to-one. Specifically, the first unit region 71 is associated with the first through gate 51, the second unit region 72 is associated with the second through gate 52, and the third unit region 73 is the third through gate. Corresponding to the gate 53.

  Each unit area 71 to 73 is formed so that normal symbols of “◯” and “x” can be displayed. When a winning to a predetermined through gate (for example, the first through gate 51) occurs, “○” and “×” in the unit region (for example, the first unit region 71) corresponding to the predetermined through gate using the winning as a trigger. ”Is displayed alternately, and the normal symbol change display (change display) is started, and the normal symbol change display is performed over a predetermined time (period). When the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning result, a normal symbol of “◯” is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the winning result in the corresponding unit area, and the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a losing result, a normal symbol of “x” is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the losing result, and the variable display ends.

  Needless to say, if the normal symbol can be identified as a winning result or a missing result, its specific shape is arbitrary. Also, the variation display mode of the normal symbol is arbitrary.

  Further, in the following description, when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the normal symbol variation display performed in the first unit region 71 is simply referred to as the first unit region 71. In other words, when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is a losing result, the normal symbol variation display performed in the first unit area 71 is simply referred to as the first unit area 71. It is also referred to as out-of-range fluctuation display. The same applies to the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73.

  The variation display of the first unit area 71 is started, the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the internal lottery is stopped (determined), and the variation display is stopped, which corresponds to one game time.

  When the normal symbol “○” is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning result, among the electrified winning award ports 41 to 43, to the electrified winning award corresponding to a predetermined through gate The expectation of winning is getting higher.

  A detailed configuration of each of the electrical winning prize ports 41 to 43 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view showing the first electric winning combination winning port 41 and its surroundings, and FIG. 5B is a front view showing the second electric winning combination winning opening 42 and its surroundings. In addition, since the 2nd electric power prize winning opening 42 and the 3rd electric power winning a prize opening 43 are the same also including the periphery structure, the 2nd electric power winning a prize opening 42 is demonstrated, About the 3rd electric power winning a prize opening 43 Will not be described in detail.

  The electric winning combinations 41 to 43 are respectively provided with electric winning members 41a to 43a. Each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a includes a pair of left and right movable pieces, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state, non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (open state, support state or guide state). It is configured. In the closed state, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is small, it is difficult for the game balls to win the respective electric winning prize ports 41 to 43. On the other hand, in the open state, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 5, the distance between the left and right movable pieces is large, so that the game balls can easily win the respective electric winning award ports 41 to 43. In other words, it can be said that the open state is one in which the flow path of the game balls to each of the electric winning prize ports 41 to 43 is larger than that in the closed state.

  In the following description, the open state of each electric combination 41a to 43a is also simply referred to as “open”, and the closed state of each electric combination 41a to 43a is simply referred to as “closed”.

  Each electric accessory 41a-43a is matched by 1 to 1 with respect to each through gate 51-53 (and each unit area | region 71-73). Specifically, the first electric combination 41a provided in the first electric winning combination port 41 is associated with the first through gate 51 (first unit region 71), and The provided second electric combination 42a is associated with the second through gate 52 (second unit region 72), and the third electric combination 43a provided at the third electric combination winning port 43 is the third through gate. It is associated with the gate 53 (third unit region 73). When the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the predetermined through gate is the winning result, after the winning variation display of the unit area corresponding to the predetermined through gate ends, the electric combination corresponding to the predetermined through gate The opening / closing operation of the object is performed in a predetermined operation mode. Thereby, the expectation degree of winning in the electric winning a prize opening provided with the electric accessory in which the opening / closing operation is performed is increased. In addition, the opening / closing operation | movement of each electric accessory 41a-43a is also called only a support. In this case, it can also be said that the state in which the opening / closing operation of each electric combination 41a to 43a is performed is the support state of each electric combination 41a to 43a.

  Here, the first electric combination winning port 41 provided with the first electric combination 41a is configured not to win a game ball regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first electric combination 41a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a first specific restriction nail 64c is provided above the first electric winning award opening 41 so as to make it impossible to win the first electric winning award opening 41. It has been. A plurality of the first specific restriction nails 64c are arranged side by side so as to surround the first electric service winning opening 41 from the original side in the flow direction of the game ball, and the distance between the first specific restriction nails 64c is determined by the diameter of the game ball. Is set too small. Thereby, the game ball cannot win the first electric role winning opening 41.

  On the other hand, above the second electric role winning port 42 (and the third electric role winning port 43), the second electric role winning port 42 cannot be won when the second electric role 42a is closed. In addition, a plurality of second specific restricting nails 64d that allow winning to the second electric winning combination winning opening 42 when the second electric winning combination 42a is in the open state are provided. Each of the second specific restriction nails 64d is arranged in parallel on the flow path to the second electric combination winning port 42 in the situation where the second electric combination 42a is in the closed state. The distance between each second specific regulating nail 64d is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the second specific restriction nail 64d and the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the closed state is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, while the second specific restriction nail 64d is in the open state. The distance from the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the situation is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the second electric combination 42a is in the closed state, it is extremely difficult to win the second electric combination winning port 42, and the second electric combination only when the second electric combination 42a is in the open state. It becomes easy to win the winning opening 42.

  In addition, as a structure which cannot make a prize to the 1st electric role winning opening 41, it is not restricted to the 1st specific regulation nail | claw 64c, but if it cannot make a winning to the 1st electric role winning opening 41, it is arbitrary. is there. For example, it is good also as a structure which replaces with the 1st specific control nail 64c and provides an accessory. Furthermore, based on the fact that a moveable accessory is provided between a position where a game ball cannot enter the first electric winning winning opening 41 and a position where the game ball is allowed to be allowed, and support for the first electric accessory 41a is started. Thus, it may be configured that the accessory is moved from the permissible position to an unusable position.

  In addition, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first electric accessory 41a, it is impossible for the game ball to win the first electric accessory winning port 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first electric accessory 41a It is good also as a structure in which the winning to the 1st electric role winning opening 41 is accept | permitted when it is an open state. In this case, when the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state, the second electric accessory 42a (or the third electric accessory 43a) is opened when the game ball is expected to win the first electric accessory winning port 41. The position of each of the specific restricting nails 64c and 64d may be adjusted so that the game ball is smaller than the degree of expectation that the game ball will win the second electric combination winning port 42 (or the third electric combination winning port 43). . In addition, there is no game ball payout based on winning in the first electric role winning port 41, or game balls are paid out based on winning in the second electric role winning port 42 and the third electric role winning port 43. You may set fewer than the number of.

  Moreover, even if each electric combination thing 41a-43a is a closed state, it is good also as a structure which can be awarded to each electric combination winning port 41-43. In short, it is only necessary that each electric winning combination 41a to 43a is configured so that the expected degree of winning to each electric winning combination winning opening 41 to 43 is increased by shifting from the closed state to the open state.

  Next, the positional relationship between the respective electric winning prize winning openings 41 to 43 will be described. The first electric winning prize winning opening 41 is provided on the right side in the game area, specifically, provided on the right side of the variable display unit 61. Yes. Further, the second electric combination winning port 42 and the third electric combination winning port 43 are provided above the variable display unit 61.

  The second electrification winning port 42 and the second electoral winning port 42 and the third electoral winning port 43 are generated so that a game ball needs to be divided between the case where the winning is generated in the second electoral winning port 42 and the case where the winning is performed in the third electoral winning port 43. The position of the third electric role winning opening 43 is set. Specifically, the second electric combination winning port 42 and the third electric combination winning port 43 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction in the game area. As a result, the flow path of the game ball that is likely to win a prize to the second electric role winning opening 42 is different from the flow path of the game ball that is likely to win a prize to the third electric role winning opening 43. Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a is performed, the player causes the game ball to flow down the left area of the game area in order to increase the winning frequency to the second electric combination winning port 42. When the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 29 is changed and the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed, a game is played in the right area of the game area in order to increase the winning frequency to the third electric winning prize opening 43. It is assumed that the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 29 is changed so that the ball flows down.

  Further, in order to suitably perform the above-described separation, the game ball that flows down the area to the left of the game area is located upstream of the second electric role winning opening 42 and the third electric role winning opening 43 in the flow direction of the game ball. Is provided so that the game ball flowing down toward the second electric combination winning opening 42 flows down toward the right side of the gaming area and flows down toward the third electric combination winning opening 43.

  It should be noted that the positional relationship between the second electric role winning port 42 and the third electric role winning port 43 may be set so as to require a distinction. For example, the first electric role winning port 41 is arranged. It is good also as a structure which arrange | positions the 3rd electric winning combination winning opening 43 in a position.

  The variable display unit 61 is provided with a symbol display device 81 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of decorative symbols (decorative symbols). The variable display unit 61 is provided with a center frame 82 so as to surround the symbol display device 81. An upper portion of the center frame 82 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 81, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ing.

  The symbol display device 81 is for informing the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51. The symbol display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 81, for example, decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 81 is performed using a winning to the first through gate 51 as a trigger.

  The center frame 82 is provided with holding lamp portions 91 to 93 corresponding to the through gates 51 to 53. Specifically, a first holding lamp portion 91 corresponding to the first through gate 51 is provided at the lower portion of the center frame 82. The maximum number of game balls won in the first through gate 51 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp portion 91 is lit.

  A second holding lamp portion 92 corresponding to the second through gate 52 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 82. The number of game balls won in the second through gate 52 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed when the second reservation lamp section 92 is turned on.

  A third holding lamp portion 93 corresponding to the third through gate 53 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 82. The number of game balls won in the third through gate 53 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed when the third reservation lamp section 93 is lit.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp parts 91-93 are displayed on some symbol display apparatuses 81.

  A stage 94 in which a game ball can stay is provided at the lower part of the center frame 82. The stage 94 has a width wider than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction, and has a smooth streamline shape that is symmetrical with respect to the center. Specifically, the horizontal central portion of the stage 94 is raised upward, and the left and right portions thereof are recessed downward. An inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear is formed at the central portion. Behind this inclined surface, a guide passage 95 having a game ball outlet is provided above the first through gate 51. As a result, the game ball that has reached the central portion of the stage 94 is guided to the guide passage 95 by the inclined surface, and is further easily guided above the first through gate 51 by the guide passage 95. The guided game ball passes through the first through gate 51 with a relatively high probability. Thereby, the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage 94 can be increased.

  Although not shown, the center frame 82 is provided with a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the stage 94. The game ball passage is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass therethrough. The game ball passage is formed with an opening provided at an outer portion of the center frame 82 as an entrance, and an opening provided at an end of the stage 94 is formed as an exit. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the entrance is led out to the stage 94 via the game ball passage.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 101 and a sound emission controller 102 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 33).

  The main control device 101 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a substrate box 103 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Contained and configured. The substrate box 103 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 104 serving as a separation preventing means (or coupling means), and the substrate box 103 is thereby sealed. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 104, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 103 is open | released, it has the structure which requires the destruction or partial excision of the said board | substrate box 103 concerned. A plurality of box coupling portions 104 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 103, and at least one of them is used for coupling processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 104 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 104, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 104 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 104. When the board box 103 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 104 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 104 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 103 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other box coupling portions 104. If the history of opening the board box 103 is left in the board box 103, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 103.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering the unauthorized opening of the substrate box 103, a seal sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the sticking location, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 103 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound emission control device 102 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 101. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 105 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 111, and a payout mechanism unit 112 and a control device assembly unit 113 are attached to the back pack 111. The back pack 111 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 114 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 101 and the sound emission control device 102 from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism section 112 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover section 114, and the tank 115 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game stored in the tank 115 A payout device 116 for paying out a ball. The game balls paid out from the payout device 116 are discharged to the upper plate 25a or the lower plate 26a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 116. The payout mechanism unit 112 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of AC 24 volts, for example, is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  The control device collective unit 113 includes a payout control device 117 and a power source and launch control device 118. The payout control device 117 and the power supply / launch control device 118 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 117 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 117 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 116 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 103 of the main control device 101 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 117.

  The power and launch control device 118 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 29 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main control device 101. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. The RAM 204 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 117, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, and the like provided in the main control device 101 are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 118 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211g, a plurality of detection sensors provided in a winning-corresponding entry portion such as a general winning opening 40, electric winning prize openings 41 to 43, through gates 51 to 53, etc. are connected. Thus, the MPU 202 of the main control device 101 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a support lottery based on winnings to the through gates 51 to 53.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 117, and a sound emission control device 102 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 117 based on the winning determination results for the general winning opening 40 and the electric winning winning holes 41 to 43. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Then, when a winning to the general winning opening 40 or each of the electronic winning holes 41 to 43 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output.

  The MPU 202 outputs various commands such as a hold command, a release command, and a change command to the sound emission control device 102. In this case, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a first electric combination drive unit 41 b that opens and closes the first electric combination 41 a of the first electric combination winning opening 41 and a second electric combination 42 a of the second electric combination winning opening 42. The second electric accessory driving unit 42b for opening / closing the third electric accessory, the third electric accessory driving unit 43b for opening / closing the third electric accessory 43a of the third electric winning prize port 43, and the accessory display unit 62 are connected. Yes. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units and display control of the accessory display unit 62 through the driver circuits.

  That is, when a winning to a predetermined through gate among the through gates 51 to 53 is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined through gate, the winning display corresponds to the predetermined through gate in the accessory display unit 62. In the unit area to be displayed, normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning is winning, after the normal symbol variation display is finished, the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit corresponding to the predetermined through gate is executed.

  Here, since each electric combination driving part 41b-43b is provided corresponding to each electric combination 41a-43a on a one-to-one basis, each electric combination 41a-43a can be individually driven and controlled. It is possible.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 118, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 118. The payout control device 117 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

  The power source and launch control device 118 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 117, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 118 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 102 is based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the holding lamp portions 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61, the display lamp portion 23 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 24 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound emission control device 102. In this case, the sound emission control device 102 determines the decorative display variable display time on the symbol display device 81 and the type of the combination of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped on the basis of various commands input from the main control device 101. To do.

  Here, the contents relating to the variation display of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7I, nine types of main symbol data with numbers “1” to “9” and as shown in FIG. 7J. The sub-symbol data not numbered is stored in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen G of the symbol display device 81 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, the winning through the first through gate 51 or the start of support of the first electric accessory 41a is used as a trigger during the variable display of the first unit area 71 or the support of the first electric accessory 41a. The decorative symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, for the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and 20 decorative symbols are formed.

  Further, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is stopped and displayed so that the lottery result can be grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols. The decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot decorative symbols) in which the same number is attached to any effective line is formed. If the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in the state of being played, a moving image indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is displayed.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Note that the decorative display variation display mode in the symbol display device 81 is not limited to that described above, and is arbitrary. The number of design columns, the direction of the decorative display variation display in the design sequence, and the decoration of each design column The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set so as to be arranged side by side, and the decorative display variable display direction in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform support lottery for determining whether or not to open / close each electric accessory 41a to 43a, setting the display of the accessory display unit 62, and so on. 9, the first electric power counter C1 used for the support lottery of the first electric combination 41a, the second electric combination counter C2 used for the support lottery of the second electric combination 42a, The third electric combination counter C3 used for the support lottery of the three electric combinations 43a is used. Furthermore, a variation type counter CS that determines a variation display time, which is a time during which variation display is performed in the accessory display 62, is used.

  Each of the power counters C1 to C3 and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 230 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with electric power holding areas 231 to 233 corresponding to the electric power counters C1 to C3, and the electric power counters C1 to C3 are stored for the corresponding electric power holding areas. . Specifically, the first electric combination holding area 231 in which the first electric combination counter C1 is stored based on the winning to the first through gate 51 and the second electric combination counter C2 based on the winning to the second through gate 52 are stored. Is stored, and a third power combination reservation area 233 in which a third power combination counter C3 is stored based on a winning to the third through gate 53 is provided.

  Each counter will be described in detail. For example, the first electric role counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the maximum value (240) and then returns to 0. The first electric combination counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the first electric combination holding area 231 at the timing when the game ball wins the first through gate 51.

  The value of the first electric power counter C1 from which the lottery result of the support lottery is a result of losing is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the first electric power counter C1 is “7”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is an outlier result. On the other hand, if the value of the first electronic combination counter C1 is other than “7”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is 240/241.

  In addition, the value of the 1st electric power counter C1 used as a removal result is arbitrary. Further, the number of first electric power counters C1 resulting in a detachment is not limited to one and may be plural.

  For example, the second electronic counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches the maximum value (250) and then returns to 0. The second electric combination counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the second electric combination holding area 232 at the timing when the game ball wins the second through gate 52.

  The value of the second electric power counter C2 that results in the support lottery being lost is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the second electric power counter C2 is “100”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a missed result. On the other hand, if the value of the second electric role counter C2 is other than “100”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the second electric accessory 42a is 250/251.

  In addition, the value of the 2nd electric power counter C2 used as a removal result is arbitrary. In addition, the number of second electric power counters C2 that result in detachment is not limited to one and may be plural.

  For example, the third power counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 232, for example, and reaches the maximum value (232) and then returns to 0. The third electric combination counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the third electric combination holding area 233 at the timing when the game ball wins the third through gate 53.

  The value of the third electric power counter C3 that results in the support lottery being lost is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the third electric power counter C3 is “200”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a missed result. On the other hand, if the value of the third electric role counter C3 is other than “200”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the third electric accessory 43a is 232/233.

  In addition, the value of the 3rd electric power counter C3 used as a removal result is arbitrary. In addition, the number of third electric power counters C3 that are the result of detachment is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  In addition, the winning probability of the support lottery is almost the same between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a, but is not limited to this, and may be set to be completely the same, increasing the difference. Also good.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time of normal symbols in the unit areas 71 to 73 of the accessory display unit 62. In the following description, the normal symbol variable display time in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is also simply referred to as the variable display time of each of the unit areas 71 to 73.

  Here, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is the winning result (hereinafter also referred to as the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71). Is set to a predetermined fixed time, specifically 0.5 sec. In contrast to this, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 when the support lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is a losing result (hereinafter referred to as the detachment fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71). Is configured to vary according to the variation type counter CS. Further, the normal symbol variation display time in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is also configured to vary in accordance with the variation type counter CS.

  Specifically, when out-of-range display is started in the first unit area 71, or when display of change is started in the other unit areas 72 and 73, the buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired. Is done. Then, by referring to the fluctuation display time table stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 provided in the ROM 203, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS is selected.

  The variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various variable display time tables. FIG. 10 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first table TD1, and FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram for explaining the second table TD2. FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third table TD3.

  The variable display time table storage area 222 stores a plurality of variable display time tables in association with the unit areas 71 to 73. Specifically, the first table TD <b> 1 that is referred to when the normal symbol variation display is performed in the first unit area 71 in the situation where the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is an outlier result. And a second table TD2 that is referred to when normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit region 72, and a third table TD3 that is referred to when normal symbol variation display is performed in the third unit region 73. And are stored.

  The first table TD1 is referred to only when the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is a losing result. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation type counter CS Is a table in which the numerical range is associated with the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit region 71. Thereby, the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 varies according to the value of the variation type counter CS.

  As shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C, the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 are tables in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is associated with the variation display time. In the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the type of variation display time are set to be the same. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time is different.

  Specifically, “0 to 79” of the variation type counter CS is associated with 0.7 sec in the second table TD2, while 1.3 sec is associated with the third table TD3. Further, 1.0 sec is associated with “80 to 159” of the variation type counter CS in the second table TD2, while 0.7 sec is associated with the third table TD3. Furthermore, 1.3 sec is associated with “160 to 198” of the variation type counter CS in the second table TD2, while 1.0 sec is associated in the third table TD3.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation where the normal symbols of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are displayed in a variable manner, the normal values in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 using the same variation type counter CS are used. When determining the symbol variable display time, different variable display times are selected. This effect will be described later.

  Here, the relationship between the variable display time of the first unit region 71 and the variable display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 will be described. The winning change display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set shorter than the shortest change display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Thereby, the winning change display of the first unit area 71 is likely to end earlier than the change display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73.

  On the other hand, the shortest deviation fluctuation display time (30 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the longest fluctuation display time (1.3 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the display of variation in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is likely to end before the display of out-of-range variation in the first unit region 71 is completed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the display time of the 2nd unit area | region 72 and the 3rd unit area | region 73 according to the lottery result of a support lottery. Specifically, the winning variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be set shorter than the outlier variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Thereby, the support space | interval of the 2nd electric power thing 42a and the 3rd electric power thing 43a can be shortened, and the privilege provided to a player can be increased.

  On the other hand, the winning fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set longer than the outlier fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Thereby, the support space | interval of the 2nd electric power thing 42a and the 3rd electric power thing 43a can be lengthened, and the privilege provided to a player can be decreased.

  Further, in the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the numerical range related to the distribution of the variation type counter CS is set to be the same (0.7 sec to 1.3 sec). The numerical value range may be different.

  Further, the distribution display time of the distribution destination is common (0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.3 sec) in both the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, but different types of variable display time are allocated. It is good also as a structure set as the tip. The third table TD3 may have a configuration in which 0.8 sec, 0.9 sec, and 1.2 sec are set as the variable display time of the distribution destination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 9, each of the telephone combination holding areas 231 to 233 will be described.

  First, the first telephone combination reservation area 231 will be described. The first electric role holding area 231 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter according to the winning history to the first through gate 51. The numerical information of the first electric power counter C1 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first through gate 51 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second reservation area RE2 → third Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the first through gate 51 are held and stored.

  In addition, the holding area RE includes a first holding number storage area N1, and the first holding number storage area N1 specifies the number in which the winning history to the first through gate 51 is stored. Information for storing is stored. Specifically, the first hold number storage area N1 stores any numerical value from 0 to 4, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the first through gate 51 is stored on hold. Know how many are there.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the first unit area 71 on the accessory display unit 62, the execution area AE displays the numerical information of the first electric role counter C1 stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. It is an area for moving.

  Next, the second telephone combination reservation area 232 will be described. Similar to the first power combination reservation area 231, the second power combination reservation area 232 includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter in accordance with a winning history to the second through gate 52. The numerical information of the second power combination counter C2 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in the reservation area RE of the second power combination reservation area 232. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 in the reservation area RE of the second electric role reservation area 232, when the winning to the second through gate 52 occurs continuously several times, Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 1 reserved area RE1, 2nd reserved area RE2, 3rd reserved area RE3, 4th reserved area RE4. Thus, by providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4, up to four game balls winning histories to the second through gate 52 are held and stored.

  In addition, the holding area RE of the second electric role holding area 232 includes a second holding number storage area N2, and the second holding number storage area N2 holds the winning history for the second through gate 52 in a holding manner. Stores information for identifying the number of images being processed. Specifically, the second hold number storage area N2 stores any numerical value from 0 to 4, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the second through gate 52 is stored on hold. Know how many are there.

  When the execution area AE of the second electric role reservation area 232 starts the variable display of the second unit area 72 on the accessory display 62, the first hold of the reservation area RE of the second electric role reservation area 232 is started. This is an area for moving the numerical information of the second electric power counter C2 stored in the area RE1.

  Next, the third electric role reservation area 233 will be described. Similar to the first electric role reservation area 231, the third electric role reservation area 233 includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter in accordance with a winning history to the third through gate 53. The numerical information of the third power combination counter C3 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the holding area RE of the third power combination holding area 233. In this case, in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 in the reserved area RE of the third electric role reserved area 233, when a winning to the third through gate 53 occurs continuously several times, Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 1 reserved area RE1, 2nd reserved area RE2, 3rd reserved area RE3, 4th reserved area RE4. Thus, by providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4, up to four game balls winning histories to the third through gate 53 are held and stored.

  In addition, the holding area RE of the third electronic role holding area 233 includes a third holding number storage area N3, and the third holding number storage area N3 holds the winning history for the third through gate 53 in a holding manner. Stores information for identifying the number of images being processed. Specifically, the third hold number storage area N3 stores any numerical value from 0 to 4, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the third through gate 53 is stored on hold. Know how many are there.

  The execution area AE of the third electric role reservation area 233 is the third hold of the reservation area RE of the third electric role reservation area 233 when starting the variable display of the third unit area 73 in the accessory display unit 62. This is an area for moving the numerical information of the third electric power counter C3 stored in the area RE3.

  Here, as already explained, while the game ball is allowed to pass through the second through gate 52 via the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52 is not passed through the first through gate 51. It is difficult for game balls to pass. For this reason, it is unlikely that an event in which the number of holds (the number of winning histories), which is the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first electronic combination holding area 231, becomes smaller than the number of holds in the second electric combination holding area 232. .

  Further, it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. For this reason, it is unlikely that an event in which the number of holds (the number of winning histories), which is the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first electronic combination holding area 231, becomes smaller than the number of holds in the third electric combination holding area 233. .

  Furthermore, since the number of holdings that can be held and stored in each of the electric utility holding areas 231 to 233 is the same, the number of winnings to each of the through gates 51 to 53 is larger than the number of holdings that can be stored. However, the above event does not occur.

  Note that the number of reservations that can be stored and reserved in each of the telephone role holding areas 231 to 233 is set to be the same (four), but is not limited to this, and a winning history that can be stored for each of the telephone role holding areas 231 to 233. It is good also as a structure from which a number differs. In this case, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described event, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first telephone combination holding area 231 is set to the number of reservations that can be stored in the second telephone combination holding area 232 or the third telephone combination holding area 233. It may be set equal to or more than (N1 ≧ N2 or N3).

<Various processes executed by main controller 101>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main control device 101 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 101 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the first electric combination counter C1, the second electric combination counter C2, and the third electric combination counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the first electric power counter C1, the second electric power counter C2, and the third electric power counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the power counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S103, a through winning process for winning through the through gates 51 to 53 is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The through winning process in step S103 will be described below.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first through gate 51. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S206. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S202, and the first number of holds. It is determined whether or not the storage area N1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  If the first reserved number storage area N1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S206. If the first reserved number storage area N1 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the first reserved number storage area N1. Is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S204, the current value of the first power combination counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area among the empty reservation areas of the first power combination reservation area 231 of the RAM 204. In step S <b> 204, a command for specifying that the first electric role counter C <b> 1 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the first holding lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the first electric power counter C1 acquired this time is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

  Thereafter, confirmation processing for holding notice is executed in step S205, and the process proceeds to step S206. In the confirmation process for holding notice, command information that reflects the lottery result based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is set.

  The confirmation process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, the value of the first electric power counter C1 acquired this time is grasped. Thereafter, support lottery processing is executed in step S302. In the support lottery process, it is determined whether or not the first electric power counter C1 grasped in step S301 corresponds to a predetermined winning value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric power counter C1 is “7”.

  In subsequent step S303, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S302 is a winning result. If the result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S304, a winning hold command is set, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended. On the other hand, if it is not a winning result, specifically, if it is a losing result, a detaching hold command is set in step S305, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended. These hold commands are transmitted toward the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of normal processing (FIG. 14) described later. The voice light emission control device 102 grasps the fact that the first electronic combination counter C1 has been acquired and the lottery result (support lottery result) of the support lottery based on the reception of these hold commands.

  As already described, since the winning probability of the support lottery based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is 240/241, the winning is almost won.

  Returning to the description of the through winning process (FIG. 12), in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second through gate 52 has won. When it is determined that the game ball has not won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S210, whereas when it is determined that the game ball has won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S207, where It is determined whether or not the storage area N2 is less than the upper limit of 4.

  If the second reserved number storage area N2 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S210. If the second reserved number storage area N2 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S208, and the second reserved number storage area N2 is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S209, the current value of the second electric utility counter C2 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the second electric utility reserved area 232 of the RAM 204. In step S209, a command for specifying that the second electric power counter C2 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the second holding lamp unit 92 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the second electric power counter C2 acquired this time is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the third through gate 53. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the third through gate 53, the winning process for this through is finished, while if it is determined that the third through gate 53 has been won, the process proceeds to step S211. Then, it is determined whether or not the third reserved number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit of 4.

  When the third reserved number storage area N3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the winning process for the through is finished as it is, whereas when the third reserved number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S212. The third reserved number storage area N3 is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S213, the current value of the third power combination counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the third power combination reserved area 233 of the RAM 204, and the through-winning process is terminated. In step S213, a command for specifying that the third electric power counter C3 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the third hold lamp unit 93 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the hold area in which the currently acquired third power counter C3 is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As its outline, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the update processing of the variation type counter CS of step S410 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 117. In addition, when various commands such as various change commands, various hold commands, and release commands are set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S403, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display process, a determination process is performed to determine whether any through gates 51 to 53 have not been awarded for a predetermined demonstration start waiting time (for example, 5.0 sec). If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 transmits the demonstration display command as it is to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 performs display control of the symbol display device 81 so that a demonstration image is displayed on the display screen G based on receiving the demonstration display command.

  Thereafter, in step S404 to step S406, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the accessory display unit 62 and each of the electric components 41a to 43a is executed.

  As already described, the unit display 71 has three unit regions 71 to 73, and each unit region 71 to 73 has a corresponding one-to-one correspondence with the electric accessories 41a to 43a. ing. For this reason, in the power combination support process, a process for controlling each of the unit areas 71 to 73 and each of the electric power articles 41a to 43a is executed. Specifically, based on the winning to each through gate 51-53, the variable display of each unit area 71-73 is started, and after the passage of the variable display time, each through gate 51-53 with respect to each unit area 71-73. The stop result corresponding to the support lottery result based on the winning is displayed, and the process of ending the above-mentioned variation display is executed. And when a support lottery result is a winning result, after the above-mentioned change display is completed (after display of a stop result), support of each electric accessory 41a-43a is started.

  Here, while the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is performed independently, the support of each of the electric combination members 41a to 43a is another electric combination in the situation where the support of one electric combination is being performed. Support for things is not done.

  Specifically, in the situation where the variable display is performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, the winning variable display of one unit area ends, and the support of the electric accessory corresponding to the one unit area is started. Based on this, the normal symbol variation display in the other unit areas is stopped. Specifically, if the normal symbol variation display is not performed in the other unit area, the variation display is not started, and if the normal symbol variation display is performed in the other unit region, the variation display is not performed. The display is configured to be reset or paused. In this case, “reset” is to invalidate the change display performed in another unit area and the lottery result that triggered the change display, and “pause” is performed in the other unit area. In this case, the count of the variation display time in the variation display is temporarily stopped. The stop of the change display is continued until the support of the electric accessory is finished. Thereby, since the variable display does not end in another unit area, support for another electric accessory is not started.

  In detail, in step S404, first of all, the first electric combination handling process related to the display control of the first unit area 71 and the drive control of the first electric combination 41a is executed in step S404. In step S405, the second electric combination handling process related to the display control of the second unit region 72 and the drive control of the second electric combination 42a is executed. Thereafter, in step S406, third electric combination handling processing related to display control of the third unit region 73 and drive control of the third electric combination 43a is executed. In other words, in one processing round, the control for changing the display of the normal symbol is performed in the order of the first unit area 71 → the second unit area 72 → the third unit area 73.

  After execution of step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, and a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 118. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S408, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (stored) in the RAM 204. The power interruption flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed, and is deleted in the next main processing.

  If the power interruption flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S409, that is, the previous process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of normal processing. Then, the variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. That is, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, the variation type counter CS can be updated at random by repeatedly performing the update of the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power interruption flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S412. After the access to the RAM 204 is prohibited in step S413, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<First electronic role handling process>
Next, the first power combination handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the variable display of the first unit region 71 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The first stop flag is a flag for specifying that the change display of the first unit region 71 is stopped, and when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. It will be deleted when the support ends.

  If the first stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported (opening / closing operation). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second support flag is set in the support flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, and whether or not the third support flag is set. Determine whether or not. The second supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed and is erased when the opening / closing operation ends. Similar to the second support flag, the third support flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed, and is deleted when the opening / closing operation ends.

  When both support flags are not set, processing related to display control of the first unit region 71 and drive control of the first electric accessory 41a is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not a dislocation result is being displayed in the first unit region 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set in the out-of-display display flag storage area 234c provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The out of display flag is a flag that is set while the out result is displayed in the first unit area 71. And, as described above, the detachment result is displayed in the first unit area 71 when the first lottery 41a is not won in the support lottery for determining whether or not to open the first electric accessory 41a.

  When the off display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S504, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first support flag is set in the support flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The first supporting flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed, and is erased when the opening / closing operation is completed.

  If the first support flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The first support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery related to the first electric accessory 41a, and is deleted when the first supporting flag is set.

  If the first support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S506, and the first timer counter T1 stored in the first timer counter area 235a provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is. The numerical value of the first timer counter T1 is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the first timer counter T1 is not “0”, the first power combination handling process is terminated as it is.

  If the first timer counter T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S507 to determine whether or not the normal symbol variation display is being performed in the first unit area 71. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S508, where the first electric combination counter C1 (holding information) stored in the first electric combination holding area 231 is still subject to the support lottery of the first electric combination 41a. It is determined whether there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than “0”.

  When the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is “0”, the first electronic role corresponding process is finished as it is, while the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than “0”. In step S509, the first normal figure change start process for starting the change display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 is executed, and the first electric role corresponding process is ended.

  The first common map change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, a process of subtracting 1 from the first reserved number storage area N1 is executed. In step S602, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, a process of shifting data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the first electric utility holding area 231 is executed. Specifically, the data in the first reserved area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, and the second reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4. → The data in each area is moved to the lower area side such as the third reserved area RE3.

  In step S602, a process for setting the first shift command is executed. The shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound emission control device 102 performs light emission control of the first hold lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the shift command.

  In subsequent step S603, a support lottery process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric power counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is “7”, which is a predetermined winning value. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S603 is a winning result. If the result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S605, and the first support winning flag is set.

  Thereafter, in step S606, “250” is set to the first timer counter T1 as the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71. As already described, since the value of the first timer counter T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, the fluctuation display time of this normal symbol is 0. 5 sec.

  After executing the processing of step S606, a winning change command is set in step S607. The winning change command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the corresponding selection change command will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is not won, the process proceeds to step S608, and the variable display time lottery process for lottering the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit region 71 is executed. In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at the current time is acquired, and the outlier fluctuation display time corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is grasped with reference to the first table TD1.

  In the subsequent step S609, a numerical value corresponding to the deviation fluctuation display time grasped in the fluctuation display time lottery process is set in the first timer counter T1. Specifically, for example, when 30 sec is recognized as the deviation fluctuation display time, “15000” is set to the first timer counter T1.

  Thereafter, in step S610, a deviation fluctuation command including information for specifying the deviation fluctuation display time is set. The deviation variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the deviation variation command will be described later.

  After execution of the process of step S607 or step S610, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71 is started in step S611, and the first normal diagram variation start process is terminated.

  That is, when the 1st electric role counter C1 is memorize | stored in the 1st electric role reservation area 231, the determination process (support lottery process) is performed using the said 1st electric role counter C1, and the said determination process is performed. As a trigger, it is designed to display normal symbols. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is determined based on the determination result (support lottery result) and the fluctuation type counter CS.

  Returning to the description of the first electric role handling process (FIG. 15), the first timer counter T1 is “0” and the first unit area 71 is variably displayed in a situation where the first support winning flag is not set. In this case (step S505: NO, step S506: YES, step S507: YES), it means that the out-of-range variation display of the first unit region 71 is finished. In this case, the detachment result is stopped and displayed as a stop result in the first unit area 71 in step S510.

  In the subsequent step S511, the out-of-display display flag is set. As a result, it is possible for the MPU 202 to specify that the detachment result is being displayed in the first unit area 71.

  In step S511, a deviation variation end command is set. Then, the first power combination handling process ends. The deviation variation end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound emission control device 102 can recognize that the out-of-range change display of the first unit region 71 is complete based on the reception of the out-of-range change end command.

  If the first support winning flag is set (step S505: YES), it is determined in step S512 whether or not the first timer counter T1 is “0”. If the first timer counter T1 is not “0”, the first electric combination handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is “0”, it means that the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is finished. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed as a stop result in the first unit area 71 in step S513.

  Thereafter, in step S514, the first support flag is set and the first support winning flag is deleted.

  In the subsequent step S515, processing for starting the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is executed. Specifically, the first electric combination driving unit 41b is controlled so that the first electric combination 41a is opened.

  Thereafter, in step S516, “3000” is set in the first timer counter T1 as the opening time (the time in which the first electric accessory 41a is open). As a result, 6 sec is set as the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. Then, “10” is set to the count counter CC stored in the count counter area 235 b provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The count counter CC is a counter for grasping the number of game balls won in the first electric combination winning port 41 in a state where the first electric combination 41a is in an open state.

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S517, and the first electric combination handling process is terminated. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the release command will be described later.

  If the out-of-display flag is not set and the first support flag is set (step S503: NO, step S504: YES), the first electric utility opening / closing process is executed in step S518, and the first The electronic role handling process is terminated.

  The first electric role opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is “0”. If the first timer counter T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S705. If the first timer counter T1 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S702, and the first electric winning prize winning opening 41 is awarded. It is determined whether or not it has occurred. If the first electric combination winning opening 41 has not been won, the first electric combination opening / closing process is terminated, while if the first electric combination winning opening 41 has been won, the process proceeds to step S703. Then, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the count counter CC is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is “0”. Since the count counter CC is set to “10” as an initial value based on the first electric combination 41a being opened, the process of step S704 is performed when the first electric combination 41a is opened. In other words, it can be said that it is a process for determining whether or not the number of game balls won in the first electric role winning opening 41 has reached a predetermined upper limit (specifically, 10).

  If the count counter CC is not “0”, the first electric utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, whereas if the count counter CC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of controlling the first electric combination driving unit 41b is executed so that the first electric combination 41a is in a closed state.

  In a succeeding step S706, the first supporting flag is deleted in order to specify that the support of the first electric accessory 41a has ended.

  Thereafter, in step S707, a closing command is set, and the first electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. The closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the close command will be described later.

  According to this process, the support of the first electric combination 41a (opening of the first electric combination 41a) is either (A) a predetermined time (6 sec) has elapsed, or (B) the first electric combination prize. The event is ended when any one of the predetermined upper limit number (10) of the winning number to the mouth 41 occurs.

  Here, as already described, winning in the first electric role winning opening 41 is disabled by the first specific regulation nail 64c. As a result, the event (B) cannot occur. Therefore, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is 6 seconds without changing according to the winning situation.

  Returning to the description of the first electronic role handling process (FIG. 15), if a detachment result is displayed in the first unit area 71, an affirmative determination is made in step S503, and the detachment display handling process is executed in step S519. Then, the first power combination handling process is terminated. That is, when the outlier result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the processing of Step S504 to Step S518 is not executed. In other words, when the outlier result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71 is not started, and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is further performed. Absent.

  The outlier display handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The outlier display corresponding process is a process for waiting for the start of the next fluctuation display until a predetermined time elapses after the outlier fluctuation display ends in the first unit region 71. When the variation display is performed in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 at the end timing of the out-of-variation display, the support based on the variation display and the variation display is executed during the predetermined time. Then, an effect related to the ending and the next variable display is performed.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is set in a standby flag storage area 234e provided in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. During the display of the disengagement result, the standby flag indicates that the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are completed. It is a flag that is set in this case, and is erased when the time required for the production related to the ending and the next variation display for notifying that the state advantageous to the player has ended has elapsed.

  If the standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether either the normal symbol variation display of the second unit region 72 or the normal symbol variation display of the third unit region 73 is performed. judge.

  Here, when a dislocation result is displayed in the first unit area 71, new variable display is not started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Furthermore, in step S502 (or step S523) of the first electric combination handling process (FIG. 15), whether or not the support of the second electric combination 42a or the support of the third electric combination 43a is performed. In the case where no support is provided, the disabling display handling process is executed. For this reason, it can be said that the process of step S802 is a process of determining whether or not the normal symbol variation display performed at the end timing of the outlier variation display and the support based on the variation display are terminated.

  When the variable display is performed in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73, the off display corresponding process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the variation display of both the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is not performed, the variation display of the normal symbol and the support based on the variation display that was performed at the end timing of the variation variation display are terminated. Means that In this case, the process proceeds to step S803, and a standby flag is set.

  In subsequent step S804, “4000” is set to the first timer counter T1 as a waiting time until the next variable display is started in the first unit area 71. Thereby, 8 sec is set as a waiting time from the timing when each operation is completed to the timing until the variable display in the first unit region 71 is started. An effect relating to the ending and the next variable display is performed using the waiting time.

  In step S805, an ending command is set, and the off-line display corresponding process is terminated. The ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the ending command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the standby flag is set, it is determined in step S806 whether the standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is “0”. If the first timer counter T1 is not “0”, it means that the standby time has not elapsed. In this case, the out-of-display display corresponding process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the first timer counter T1 is “0”, it means that the standby time has elapsed. In this case, in step S807, the out-of-display display flag is deleted, the standby flag is deleted, and the out-of-display display corresponding process is terminated.

  According to this processing, the next fluctuation display for the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is the normal symbol fluctuation display performed at the end timing after the deviation fluctuation display ends, and the It is not started until the support based on the variable display is finished and the standby time has elapsed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to execute the normal symbol fluctuation display performed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display and the support based on the fluctuation display between the deviation fluctuation display and the next fluctuation display. At the same time, it is possible to perform effects related to the ending and the next variable display in the first unit region 71.

  The details of the effects related to the ending and the next variable display in the first unit area 71 will be described together with the processing executed by the sound emission control device 102.

  Returning to the description of the first electronic role handling process (FIG. 15), if the second support flag or the third support flag is set (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to steps S520 to S522. When the normal symbol variation display is not performed in the one unit area 71, the normal symbol variation display is not newly started in the first unit region 71, and the normal symbol variation is displayed in the first unit region 71. When the display is being performed, a process for temporarily stopping the variable display is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S520, it is determined whether or not the variable display is performed in the first unit region 71. When the variable display is performed in the first unit area 71, the process proceeds to step S521, and a pause process for maintaining the remaining variable display time of the variable display at the present time and the support lottery result related to the variable display is executed.

  Specifically, the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. Thereby, the current first timer counter T1 is maintained. If the first support winning flag is set, the first support winning flag is maintained.

  And the fluctuation display of the normal symbol currently performed in the 1st unit area | region 71 is suspended. In this case, both “◯” and “×” ordinary symbols are displayed blinking simultaneously.

  When the variable display is not being performed in the first unit area 71, or after execution of the process of step S521, the first stop flag is set in step S522, and the first electric role corresponding process is performed. finish.

  If the normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71 is stopped (step S501: YES), it is determined in step S523 whether the second supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the first electric power corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if both the supporting flags are not set, the process proceeds to steps S524 to S526. The process for canceling the stop of the variable display of the first unit area 71 is executed. In this case, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is paused, the display is resumed from the paused state.

  Specifically, first, in step S524, it is determined whether or not updating of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. If the update of the first timer counter T1 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S526 as it is, whereas if the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S525 and the first timer counter T1 is updated. The prohibition of updating is canceled and the normal symbol fluctuation display is resumed. As a result, the update of the first timer counter T1 is resumed.

  In step S526, the first stop flag is deleted. Then, the process proceeds to step S503.

  That is, when the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is started in the situation where the normal symbol variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the normal symbol to be stopped is displayed. The count of the variable display time is temporarily stopped while the support lottery result related to the variable display is maintained. Then, based on the end of the support, the counting of the variable display time is resumed.

  Incidentally, when the process related to the cancellation of the stop (step S524 to step S526) is executed, the process proceeds to step S503, so that the cancellation of the stop and the start of the variable display can be performed in the same processing times. Thereby, when the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is finished, the variation display of the first unit region 71 is performed after the variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Being started is avoided.

  Specifically, when the support of the second electric combination 42a is completed in a predetermined processing time in the normal processing, the suspension of the normal symbol variation display is executed in the third electric power corresponding process in the predetermined processing time. It is configured to be. Then, the stop of the normal symbol is executed in the first electric power corresponding process in the next processing time for the predetermined processing time, and the variable display of the first unit region 71 can be started. In the next processing round, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are displayed in a variable manner in the second electric combination corresponding process and the third electric combination corresponding process executed after the first electric combination corresponding process. Can be done.

  In addition, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a is ended in a predetermined processing time in the normal processing, the normal symbol variation display is stopped in the first electric power corresponding process of the next processing time for the predetermined processing time. The release is executed, and the variable display of the first unit area 71 can be started. In the next processing round, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are displayed in a variable manner in the second electric combination corresponding process and the third electric combination corresponding process executed after the first electric combination corresponding process. Can be done.

  According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the winning variation display time is set to be the same in the first unit region 71, the second unit region 72, and the third unit region 73, and the support for one electric accessory is terminated. Even if the variable display stop of the unit areas 71 to 73 is released based on the above, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends before the first unit area 71. There is no.

  It should be noted that after execution of the process related to the cancellation of the stop, the first power combination handling process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the processing load related to one processing time can be reduced. However, when the winning variation display time is the same in the first unit region 71, the second unit region 72, and the third unit region 73, and the variation display of each of the unit regions 71 to 73 is started simultaneously, the second unit region In view of the fact that the variable display of 72 and the third unit region 73 may end before the first unit region 71, the above configuration is superior.

  Further, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, the current first timer counter T1 is temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and when the stop of the variable display of the first unit area 71 is canceled, The stored first timer counter T1 may be reset with respect to the first timer counter T1.

<Second electric role handling process>
Next, the second power combination handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, whether or not the variable display of the second unit region 72 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a. Determine whether. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second stop flag is set for the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The second stop flag is a flag for specifying that the change display of the second unit region 72 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. It will be deleted when the support ends.

  If the second stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the first electric combination 41a or the third electric combination 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the first supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set.

  When the both supporting flags are not set, processing related to display control of the second unit region 72 and drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second support flag is set.

  If the second support flag is not set, the process advances to step S904 to determine whether or not the second support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The second support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery for determining whether or not to perform the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and is deleted when the second supporting flag is set.

  If the second support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S905, and the second timer counter T2 stored in the second timer counter area 235c provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. The second timer counter T2 is updated so that the value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the second timer counter T2 is not “0”, the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  If the second timer counter T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the normal symbol variation display is being performed in the second unit area 72. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S907, where the second electric combination counter C2 (holding information) stored in the second electric combination holding area 232 is still subject to support lottery of the second electric combination 42a. It is determined whether there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than “0”.

  When the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is “0”, the second correspondence process is terminated as it is, while the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than “0”. In step S908, it is determined whether or not the dislocation result is being displayed in the first unit region 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

  If the out-of-display display flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S909, where the second normal pattern variation start process for starting the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit region 72 is executed, The combination handling process is terminated.

  The second common map variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, since the process of step S1001-step S1004 is the same as the process of step S601-step S604 of a 1st common figure change start process (FIG. 16), detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  If the current support lottery is a win, an affirmative decision is made in step S1004 and the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, the second support winning flag is set, and “2” is set to the round counter RC provided in the round counter area 235d provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The round counter RC is a counter for defining the number of times (the number of times of opening) that the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is opened in one opening / closing operation.

  After step S1005 is executed or when negative determination is made in step S1004, in step S1006, a variable display time lottery process for determining the variable symbol display time in the second unit region 72 by lottery is executed. Specifically, the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired and the second table TD2 is referenced to grasp the variation display time corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS.

  In step S1007, a numerical value corresponding to the lottery result in step S1006 is set in the second timer counter T2. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result in step S1006 is 1.0 sec, “500” is set to the second timer counter T2. After that, in step S1008, the variation display of the second unit region 72 is started, and the second normal map variation start process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the second electric combination handling process (FIG. 19), if the out-of-display flag is set, an affirmative decision is made in step S908, and the second electric combination handling process is terminated as it is. As a result, the second map change start process is not executed. Therefore, in the situation where the dislocation result is displayed in the first unit area 71, the variable display of the second unit area 72 is not newly started.

  When the second support counter flag is not set and the second timer counter T2 is “0” and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the second unit area 72 (step S904: NO, step S905: YES, Step S906: YES), it means that the out-of-range variation display of the second unit area 72 has ended. In this case, the outage result is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72 in step S910, and the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  When the second support winning flag is set (step S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. If the second timer counter T2 is not “0”, the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the second timer counter T2 is “0”, it means that the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 is finished. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72 in step S912.

  In subsequent step S913, the second support flag is set and the second support winning flag is deleted. Thereafter, in step S914, "10" is set as the upper limit value of the number of game balls to be won in the second electric combination winning port 42 in the count counter CC, and the second electric combination handling process is ended.

  When the second supporting flag is set (step S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S915, executes the second electric combination opening / closing process, and ends the second electric combination corresponding process. The second electric role opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The mode of the opening / closing operation (support) of the second electric accessory 42a is such that the second electric accessory 42a is first opened for a short period of time for a relatively short time, and then short after a predetermined interval time. The second electric combination 42a is opened for a long time longer than the time opening.

  Specifically, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second electric accessory 42a is being opened (open state). If the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, whereas if the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1103, and the second electric accessory is The process which controls the 2nd electrically-driven accessory drive part 42b is performed so that 42a may be open | released.

  Specifically, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “2”. Since the round counter RC is set to “2” as an initial value, when the round counter RC is “2”, this means that the current release is the first (first) release. In this case, a count stop command is set in step S1105. The count stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the count stop command will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S1106, “250” is set in the second timer counter T2, and the second electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the round counter RC is not “2”, “2750” is set in the second timer counter T2 as the opening time of the long-time opening (second opening) in step S1107, and the second electric utility The opening / closing process is terminated.

  When the second electric accessory 42a is not open, the process proceeds to step S1108, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter T2 is “0”. When the second timer counter T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1109, and a process of controlling the second electric accessory driving unit 42b so as to close the second electric accessory 42a is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1110, an update process for subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is executed.

  In step S1111, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1117. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1112, and the second timer counter T2 is set to “500”. The electric utility opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the second timer counter T2 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1113, and a process of determining whether or not a winning to the second electric role winning opening 42 has occurred is executed. If no winning is made to the second electric winning prize opening 42, the second electric winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. If a winning is made to the second electric winning prize opening 42, the process proceeds to step S1114. Then, an update process for subtracting 1 from the count counter CC is executed.

  In a succeeding step S1115, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is “0”. If the count counter CC is not “0”, the second electric combination opening / closing process is terminated as it is, whereas if the count counter CC is “0”, the second electric combination 42a is closed in step S1116. The process which controls the 2nd electric accessory drive part 42b is performed, and it progresses to step S1117.

  In step S1117, a process of terminating the support of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. Specifically, the second supporting flag is deleted. In step S1118, a count restart command is set, and the second electric utility opening / closing process ends. The count restart command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 by receiving the count restart command will be described later.

  According to this process, when the support of the second electric combination 42a is started, the second electric combination 42a is first opened for a short time. The opening time for the short-time opening is set to 0.5 sec. After the opening for a short time, the second electric accessory 42a is closed. The closure continues for 1 second. Then, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a long time after the above time has elapsed.

  The support of the second electric accessory 42a is determined in advance as (A) the opening time of the second electric accessory 42a, specifically, the combination of the opening time of the short opening and the opening time of the long opening. Either the upper limit opening time (0.5 sec + 5.5 sec = 6.0 sec) or (B) the number of game balls won in the second electric role winning opening 42 becomes a predetermined upper limit number (10) Continue until either event occurs. Thereby, while being able to adjust the privilege provided with respect to a player, the situation where support does not end due to a game ball not winning can be prevented.

  In this case, since the opening time of the short time opening is set to be shorter than 0.6 seconds that is the game ball firing cycle, the game is directed toward the second electric winning prize opening 42 after the short time opening is started. Even if the ball is fired, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize while it is open for a short time.

  In addition, since the interval time is set to be longer than the launch period of the game ball, the game ball is fired at least once during the interval time.

  Returning to the description of the second power combination handling process (FIG. 19), if the first supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set, an affirmative decision is made in step S902. In step S916 to step S920, if the normal symbol fluctuation display is not performed in the second unit area 72, the normal symbol fluctuation display is not newly started in the second unit area 72. When the normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit area 72, a process of resetting (invalidating) or temporarily suspending the variation display is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the variable display is performed in the second unit region 72. If the variable display is not performed, the second stopping flag is set in step S920, and the second correspondence process is terminated. As a result, the second common symbol variation start process is not executed in the second electric role corresponding process (FIG. 19), and the normal symbol variation display is not newly started in the second unit region 72.

  On the other hand, when the variable display is performed in the second unit area 72, the process proceeds to step S917, and it is determined whether or not the first support flag is set.

  When the first supporting flag is set, the process proceeds to step S918, and the normal symbol variation display currently performed in the second unit area 72 and the variation for resetting the support lottery result related to the variation display are performed. Execute reset processing. Specifically, the second timer counter T2 is initialized to “0”. Further, the normal symbol variation display is terminated without displaying the stop result. If the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is deleted.

  Thereafter, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  If the first support flag is not set, it means that the third support flag is set. In this case, in step S919, a pause process for maintaining the remaining fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 at the present time and the support lottery result related to the fluctuation display is executed. Specifically, the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, and the normal symbol variation display is temporarily stopped. If the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is maintained.

  Thereafter, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  If the normal symbol variation display in the second unit area 72 is stopped (step S901: YES), it is determined in step S921 whether the first supporting flag or the third supporting flag is set. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the second power combination corresponding process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if both the supporting flags are not set, the process goes to steps S922 to S924. Then, a process for canceling the stop of the variable display of the second unit area 72 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S922, it is determined whether or not the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is not prohibited, the process proceeds to step S924 as it is, whereas if the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S923 to update the second timer counter T2. The prohibition is canceled and normal symbols are displayed again.

  Thereafter, in step S924, the second stopping flag is erased, and the second power combination handling process is terminated.

  According to this process, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in the situation where the normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit region 72, the normal symbol variation display currently performed is displayed. Is reset. Specifically, the normal symbol variation display currently performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the variation display is deleted. As a result, after the stop of the normal symbol variation display in the second unit area 72 is released, the second unit combination 72 is based on the second electric combination counter C2 stored in the second electric combination holding area 232. The normal symbol variation display is newly performed.

  On the other hand, when the support of the third electric accessory 43a is started in the situation where the normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit area 72, the support lottery result related to the variation display of the stop target is maintained. The pause of the variable display time is paused. Then, based on the end of the support of the third electric accessory 43a, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

<Third electronic role handling process>
Next, the third power combination handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step SS1201, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the third unit region 73 is stopped based on the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third stop flag is set for the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The third stop flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the third unit area 73 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is started. It will be deleted when the support ends.

  If the third stopped flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the first supporting flag or the second supporting flag is set.

  When both the supporting flags are not set, processing related to display control of the third unit region 73 and drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third support flag is set.

  If the third support flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the third support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The third support winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the support lottery for determining whether or not to perform the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, and is deleted when the third supporting flag is set.

  If the third support winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the third timer counter T3 stored in the third timer counter area 235e provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. The third timer counter T3 is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the third timer counter T3 is not “0”, the third power combination handling process is terminated as it is.

  If the third timer counter T3 is “0”, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the normal symbol variation display is being performed in the third unit area 73. If the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the third electric combination counter C3 (holding information) stored in the third electric combination holding area 233 is still subject to the support lottery of the third electric combination 43a. It is determined whether there is something that is not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is larger than “0”.

  When the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is “0”, the third correspondence processing is terminated as it is, while the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is larger than “0”. In step S1208, it is determined whether or not the dislocation result is being displayed in the first unit region 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

  If the out-of-display flag is set, the third correspondence process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the out-of-display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1209 and the third unit area 73 The third common figure fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the third electric role corresponding process is ended. The third map change start process is the same as the second map change start process (FIG. 20), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the second common map variation start process and the third general map variation start process may be executed in the same processing time of the normal process (FIG. 14). In this case, the variation display time is lottery using the same variation type counter CS.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the variation display time associated with the value of the variation type counter CS differs between the second table TD2 and the third table TD3. Thereby, even when the same variation type counter CS is used, different variation display times are selected in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73.

  When the third support counter flag is not set and the third timer counter T3 is “0” and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the third unit area 73 (step S1204: NO, step S1205: YES, In step S1206: YES), it means that the normal symbol out-of-range variation display is finished in the third unit region 73. In this case, the outage result is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73 in step S1210, and the third power combination handling process is terminated.

  If the third support winning flag is set (step S1204: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211, and it is determined whether or not the third timer counter T3 is “0”. If the third timer counter T3 is not “0”, the third power combination handling process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the third timer counter T3 is “0”, it means that the normal symbol winning variation display in the third unit area 73 is finished. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73 in step S1212.

  In the subsequent step S1213, the third support flag is set and the third support winning flag is deleted.

  Thereafter, in step S1214, "10" is set as the upper limit value of the number of game balls to be won in the third electric combination winning port 43 in the count counter CC, and the third electric combination handling process is ended.

  When the third supporting flag is set (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1215, the third electric combination opening / closing process is executed, and the third electric combination corresponding process is terminated. Since the third electric combination opening / closing process is basically the same as the second electric combination opening / closing process (FIG. 21), the description thereof is omitted.

  When the first supporting flag or the second supporting flag is set, the third symbol is displayed in step S1216 to step S1220 when the normal symbol variation display is not performed in the third unit area 73. The normal symbol variation display is not newly started in the unit area 73, and when the normal symbol variation display is performed in the third unit region 73, the variation display is reset or paused. To do. Since this process is basically the same as steps S916 to S920 of the second power combination handling process (FIG. 19), description thereof is omitted.

  Further, when the normal symbol variation display in the third unit area 73 is stopped (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether or not the first supporting flag or the second supporting flag is set in step S1221. To do. If either one of the both supporting flags is set, the third power combination corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if both the supporting flags are not set, the process proceeds to steps S1222 to S1224. Then, the process for canceling the stop of the variable display of the third unit area 73 is executed. Since this process is basically the same as Step S922 to Step S924 of the second power combination handling process (FIG. 19), description thereof is omitted.

  According to this process, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in the situation where the normal symbol variation display is performed in the third unit region 73, the normal symbol variation display currently performed is displayed. Is reset. Specifically, the normal symbol variation display currently performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the variation display is deleted. As a result, after the stop of the normal symbol variation display in the third unit area 73 is released, the third unit combination 73 is based on the third electric combination counter C3 stored in the third electric combination holding area 233. The normal symbol variation display is newly performed.

  On the other hand, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started in the situation where the normal symbol variation display is performed in the third unit region 73, the support lottery result related to the variation display of the stop target is maintained. The pause of the variable display time is paused. Then, based on the end of the support of the second electric accessory 42a, the counting of the variable display time is resumed.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game, specifically, the normal symbol variation display in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 and the operation of each electric accessory 41a to 43a will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. (A)-(c) shows the winning to each through gate 51-53, (d)-(f) shows the execution timing of the change display of the normal symbol in each unit area 71-73, (g)- (H) shows the opening and closing mode of each electric accessory 41a to 43a.

  First, a game ball wins the first through gate 51 at the timing of t1 in a situation where each holding information, specifically, each of the electronic counters C1 to C3 is not acquired in each of the electronic combination holding areas 231 to 233. . As a result, the first electric power counter C1 is acquired, the support lottery using the first electric power counter C1 is performed, and the variable display is started in the first unit area 71. The support lottery result is the winning result. In this case, 0.5 sec is set as the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71.

  Thereafter, the game ball that has won the first through gate 51 wins the second through gate 52 at the timing of t2. As a result, the second power combination counter C2 is acquired, the support lottery using the second power combination counter C2 is performed, and the variable display is started in the second unit area 72.

  In other words, when the holding information is not acquired in each of the telephone role holding areas 231 to 233, the normal symbol variation display of the unit areas 71 to 73 is sequentially started at the acquired timing. In this case, the first through gate 51 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, and further, the second through gate 52 or the third through gate is not interposed through the first through gate 51. Since the winning of the gate 53 is restricted, the acquisition timing of the first power combination counter C1 is unlikely to be later than the acquisition timings of the other power combination counters C2 and C3. For this reason, in a situation where the normal symbol variation display is not performed in each of the unit regions 71 to 73, the variation display in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is performed before the variation display in the first unit region 71. Events that are initiated are unlikely to occur.

  Thereafter, the winning variation display of the first unit region 71 ends at the timing of t3.

  Here, the longest time from the passage timing of the first through gate 51 to the passage timing of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is shorter than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit region 71. Thus, the distance between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53 is set. The shortest fluctuation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set longer than the winning fluctuation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71. This makes it easy to start the display of variation in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 during the winning variation display of the first unit region 71, and during the display of variation in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73. The winning variation display in the first unit area 71 is likely to end.

  Further, at the timing of t3, the opening / closing operation (support) of the first electric accessory 41a is started based on the end of the winning variation display. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened.

  Further, based on the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a being started (the winning variation display is terminated in the first unit region 71), the currently displayed variation display, specifically, the second unit region 72 normal symbol fluctuation display stops. In this case, the change display of the normal symbol that is the stop target and the support lottery result related to the change display are reset. Thus, during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is terminated, and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are displayed. Opening and closing operations are not performed.

  In order to distinguish between the end of normal fluctuation display and the stop (end) of fluctuation display related to reset, the stop of fluctuation display related to reset is indicated by an arrow in FIGS.

  Thereafter, at the timings t4 and t5 during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, a winning to the first through gate 51 and the third through gate 53 occurs. In this case, since the first electric accessory 41a is being opened / closed (supported), the normal symbol variation display in the third unit region 73 is not started.

  Then, at the timing of t6, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is completed. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, the normal symbol variation display is performed again in the first unit area 71. The variation display is based on the occurrence of a winning to the first through gate 51 at the timing t4. The change display is a winning change display. In this case, the variable display time is 0.5 sec.

  Further, the stop of the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is released based on the end of the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a. Thereby, the variable display of the third unit region 73 based on the winning to the third through gate 53 at the timing of t5 is started. In this case, any one of 0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1, 3 sec is set as the variable display time of the third unit region 73 regardless of the result of the determination.

  Thereafter, a winning to the first through gate 51 occurs at timing t7. Then, the winning variation display of the first unit region 71 ends at the timing of t8. Based on the end of the corresponding selection variation display, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is started, and the currently performed variation display, specifically, the variation display of the normal symbol in the third unit region 73 is stopped. To do. In this case, the change display of the normal symbol that is the stop target and the support lottery result related to the change display are reset.

  That is, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit region 71, the winning variation display ends at a timing before the end timing of the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. . Then, based on the fact that the winning variation display of the first unit region 71 is completed and the first electric accessory 41a is opened and closed, the variation display of the normal symbols in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is performed. Stop. In this case, the change display of the normal symbol that is the stop target and the support lottery result related to the change display are reset. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is not performed, and only the opening / closing operation of the first electric combination 41a is performed. As already explained, since the winning to the first electric combination 41a is impossible, there are few benefits based on the opening / closing operation of the first electric combination 41a.

  Incidentally, as already explained, the number of holds that can be stored in each of the electric role holding areas 231 to 233 is four. For this reason, when a large number of game balls pass through the first through gate 51 within a time shorter than the digestion time of the holding information, the second electric power is more than the number of holdings stored in the first electric charge holding area 231. There may occur an event in which the sum of the number of reservations stored in both the combination holding area 232 and the third electronic combination holding area 233 is larger (N1 <N2 + N3). In this case, the variable display is performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. In the above situation, when the variation display of the first unit region 71 is the winning variation display, the winning variation display is likely to end earlier than the variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. When the winning variation display in the first unit region 71 is completed, the variation display in both the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is reset. In other words, the 1 fluctuation display and the 2 fluctuation display and the support lottery result are reset. Thereby, even if it is a case where the said event generate | occur | produces, the event from which the support of the 2nd electrically-driven item 42a or the 3rd electrically-driven item 43a is started does not occur.

  Thereafter, a prize is awarded to one of the through gates 51 to 53 at the timing t9 to t13 during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a.

  Then, at the timing of t14, the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is completed, and the variable display is started in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. In this case, it is assumed that out-of-range display is performed in the first unit area 71 and winning change display is performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. In this case, since the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the fluctuation display time in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 is earlier. In addition, the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is ended.

  Here, if the variable display time of the second unit area 72 is selected to be shorter than the variable display time of the third unit area 73, the variable display of the second unit area 72 is first terminated at the timing t15. Then, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started. Specifically, the first opening is performed in the second electric accessory 42a. Based on the start of the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit region 71 and the third unit region 73 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit region 71 or the third unit region 73 is terminated while the second electric combination 42a is opened, and the first electric combination 41a and the third electric combination 43a are opened and closed. Is not started. In FIGS. 23 (d) to 23 (f), a situation where the vehicle is temporarily stopped is indicated by a double line.

  At the subsequent timing t16, the first opening of the second electric accessory 42a is completed. Then, the second opening of the second electric accessory 42a is performed at the timing t17 when 1 sec has elapsed from the timing t16.

  After that, at the timing of t18, an end condition for the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a is established, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a is ended. In this case, when the hold information (second call combination counter C2) is stored in the second charge combination reservation area 232, the normal symbol variable display based on the hold information is newly started in the second unit area 72. Is done.

  Further, based on the end of the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the variable display that has been temporarily stopped in the first unit region 71 and the third unit region 73 is resumed. That is, the time during which the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed (the time from the timing t15 to the timing t18) is the suspension time.

  At the subsequent timing t19, the remaining variable display time of the third unit region 73 has elapsed, and the normal symbol variable display in the third unit region 73 ends. Based on the end, the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started. Specifically, the first opening is performed in the third electric accessory 43a. Based on the start of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit region 71 and the second unit region 72 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit region 71 or the second unit region 72 ends while the third electric combination 43a is opened, and the first electric combination 41a and the second electric combination 42a are opened and closed. Is not started.

  Here, the time obtained by combining the time from the timing t14 to the timing t15 and the time from the timing t18 to the timing t19 is the variation display time of the third unit region 73. In other words, the timing of t19 when the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started is the same as the fluctuation display time of the third unit region 73 from the timing of t14 when the variation display of the third unit region 73 is started. It can be said that it is the timing when the time when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed is combined.

  Then, the first opening is completed at the timing of t20, and the second opening is performed at the timing of t21. The second opening continues until the end condition is satisfied.

  When the end condition of the opening / closing operation of the third electric combination 43a is satisfied at the timing of t22, the opening / closing operation of the third electric combination 43a is ended. In this case, when the hold information (third call combination counter C3) is stored in the third charge combination hold area 233, the variable symbol display based on the hold information is newly started in the third unit area 73. Is done.

  In addition, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the normal symbol variable display that has been temporarily stopped in the first unit region 71 and the second unit region 72 is resumed. Then, at the timing of t23, the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 ends, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started again, and in the first unit region 71 and the third unit region 73. Ordinary symbol variation display pauses.

  The time obtained by combining the time from the timing t18 to the timing t19 and the time from the timing t22 to the timing t23 is the variation display time of the second unit region 72. In other words, the timing of t23 when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started is the same as the fluctuation display time of the second unit region 72 from the timing t18 when the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 is started. It can be said that it is the timing when the time when the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is performed is combined.

  In other words, during the out-of-range display of the first unit region 71, the normal symbol display in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is finished, and the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a are opened and closed. Operation is performed. In this case, while the opening / closing operation of one of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is being performed, the change display of the normal symbol in each unit area corresponding to the other electric combination Is paused. Then, based on the end of the opening / closing operation of one electric accessory, the normal symbol variation display in each unit area corresponding to the other electric accessory is resumed, and further, the unit area corresponding to one electric accessory The change display of the normal symbol at is started. Thereby, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second electric combination winning port 42 and the third electric combination winning port 43 is increased in a situation where the normal symbol deviation variation display is performed in the first unit area 71. Therefore, the benefits given to the player increase compared to the case where the winning variation display is performed in the first unit region 71.

  In this case, the support interval of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a depends on the variable display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. These fluctuation display times vary according to the fluctuation type counter CS. This makes it difficult to grasp the support interval based on the end timing of support. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while predicting the start timing of support, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game during which the first unit region 71 is being displayed with the deviation variation displayed.

  In particular, at the start timing of the out-of-range variation display of the first unit region 71, the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 can start variation display at the same time. In this case, the fluctuation display times of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are determined using the same fluctuation type counter CS. In this case, since the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 have different display times corresponding to the change type counter CS, the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 have different display times. Is selected. As a result, after one variation display and the opening / closing operation based thereon are completed, the other variation display is immediately terminated, and the opening / closing operation based on the other variation display is not performed.

  In addition, as already described, the opening / closing operation mode of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is configured to be opened for a long time after an interval of 1 sec after being opened for a short time. Therefore, the player confirms that the opening has been performed for a short time, and grasps the electric accessory to be opened / closed this time. Then, a game ball is fired toward an electric winning prize opening provided with an electric accessory that is opened / closed this time during an interval of 1 sec. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a prize winning to the electric winning award corresponding to the electric accessory that is opened and closed. In other words, it can be said that the short-time opening of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is for informing the player of the electric combination to be opened / closed this time. It can be said that the interval between the opening and the long-time opening is a time for the player to decide based on the notification.

  In particular, in a situation where the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a can be supported, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a. . In such a situation, since the notification of the sieving is performed by the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric mechanic 43a which is the target of attention, the player can surely confirm the notification of the sieving. ing.

  Further, since the interval time is set longer than the game ball firing cycle, at least one game ball can be fired during the interval. Thereby, the launch direction of the game ball can be adjusted based on the flow-down mode of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the above-described sorting.

  Furthermore, the support termination condition includes that the total opening time of the short time opening and the long time opening becomes the upper limit opening time. In such a configuration, since the first opening as the notification of the game is a short time opening, it is possible to ensure a long opening time for giving the player a long time. Thereby, it is possible to suitably notify the game while ensuring the player's profit.

  In addition, about the opening / closing operation | movement aspect of the 2nd electric combination 42a and the 3rd electric combination 43a, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure open | released 3 times or more. In this case, if the number of times the opening is performed for a short time is increased, the opening / closing operation target is easily grasped. On the other hand, since it becomes necessary to shorten the opening time for a long time so as not to exceed the upper limit opening time, it is easy for the player to obtain less benefits.

  In addition, the short-time opening and the long-time opening with different opening times are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening may be performed a plurality of times in one opening time. In this case, the release time may be set longer than 0.6 sec of the game ball firing cycle so that the game ball can enter to some extent during the release.

  The interval time is arbitrary as long as the time for performing the allocation is secured. However, if the interval time is set to be long, there is a risk that a game ball will not be fired during the interval, that is, a so-called stop-attack may be performed. It is good to have.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which prepares the several opening / closing aspect from which interval time differs, and selects one opening / closing aspect from the said several opening / closing aspect when opening / closing operation | movement is started. Also with this configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned stop hitting.

  The variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a are repeatedly performed, and the deviation variation display of the first unit region 71 is performed at the timing t24. When the time elapses, the dislocation result is displayed in the first unit area 71. In this case, the normal symbol variation display performed in the second unit region 72 is continuously performed.

  Incidentally, as already explained, the count of the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit region 71 is counted only when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is not performed. In other words, the time from the start timing of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing t14) to the end timing of the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing t24) is the deviation fluctuation display determined by lottery. This time is the sum of the time and the time when the opening / closing operation of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is performed.

  Thereafter, a prize is awarded to the third through gate 53 at timing t25. In this case, since the dislocation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, new variable display is not started in the third unit area 73.

  Then, the fluctuation display of the second unit region 72 is finished at the timing of t26, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t27. As a result, the variation display of the second unit region 72, the variation display of the third unit region 73, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a are finished, and the standby Time counting starts.

  Then, at the timing t28 when the standby time has elapsed, the display of the detachment result is finished, and a new variable display is started in each of the unit areas 71 to 73.

  In other words, when the out-of-range display of the first unit area 71 is completed, the display of change in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is continued without being stopped. For this reason, during the display of the deviation result of the first unit area 71, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may end. In this case, if the variation display is the winning variation display, the corresponding opening / closing operation of the electric accessory is performed.

  On the other hand, during the display of the result of detachment of the first unit area 71, it is restricted that the variable display is newly started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. That is, during the display of the detachment result of the first unit area 71, the display in which the variability display has already been performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 at the end timing of the detachment change display is normal. Processing is performed, and thereafter, no new variation display is started. In other words, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (from the timing of t14 to the timing of t27) after the display of the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is started (from the timing of t14 to the timing of t27) ), And the change display of each of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the support of each of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a may end. It is the termination condition of the advantageous state.

  In this embodiment, the display time of the detachment result is determined based on the display start timing of the detachment result from each of the second unit region 72, the third unit region 73, the second electric combination 42a, and the third electric combination 43a. Although the time until the timing when the operation ends and the standby time are combined, the time is not limited to this, and may be set as a predetermined fixed time, for example. In this case, the fixed time is a time obtained by combining the longest time required for the change display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a with the standby time. It is better to set longer. Accordingly, there is no inconvenience that the display of the detachment result is terminated in the situation where each operation is performed, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being disadvantaged.

<About the configuration for performing various effects>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects using the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 81 will be described.

  First, an electrical configuration for performing various effects will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the sound emission control board 241 provided in the sound emission control device 102. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. The RAM 244 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main controller 101 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 101, the various commands already described are received.

  On the output side of the MPU 242, the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61 and the display lamp unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected, and the display control device 212. Is connected. The MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 determines an effect pattern based on the command received from the main control device 101, transmits the effect command corresponding to the effect pattern to the display control device 212, and receives it from the main control device 101. The transmitted command is transmitted to the display control device 212 as it is.

  The display control device 212 is equipped with an MPU 252 which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  In the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, processing corresponding to the effect command is executed based on the reception of various effect commands from the sound emission control device 102, and drawing is performed on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 corresponding to the processing result. By executing the processing, various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 81. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 81 to display the image data.

  The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 81. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display decoration patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the display content of the symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 257.

<Production control process executed by the sound emission control device 102>
Next, the effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is periodically started by the MPU 242 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec), and determines one effect among various effects based on a command received from the main control device 101, and Based on the determined aspect of the effect, processing for causing the decorative screen to be displayed on the display screen G is executed.

  In the following description, the normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71 will be described as game times. As described above, the game times means that the normal symbol variation display is started in the first unit area 71, the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is displayed, and the normal symbol variation display is stopped. is there. In this case, the game times when the support lottery result is the win result (the normal symbol win fluctuation display in the first unit area 71) is the winning game time, and the game times when the support lottery result is the outlier result (first unit) The normal symbol deviation fluctuation display in the area 71 is referred to as an off-game time. The game time of the winning game times is the winning change display time of the first unit area 71, and the game time of the out of game times is the out change display time of the first unit area 71.

  As various effects, a plurality of kinds of effects corresponding to the game times are prepared. Specifically, for the holding notice effect and the short-time holding notice effect that are performed when the next game time is continued with respect to the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times, and the predetermined winning game times. Advantages to be made in the short-time normal performance and out-of-game times when the next winning game times are discontinuous (except between out-of-game times and winning game times) with respect to the support of the first electric combination 41a based on Production during the state is set.

  The holding notice effect and the short-time holding notice effect are the contents of the holding information (first electric role counter C1) stored in the first electric role holding area 231, specifically the support lottery result using the holding information. This is a suggestion. The hold notice effect and the short-time hold notice effect are the timing before the game time related to the hold information is started, specifically, the first electric accessory 41a related to the hold information immediately before the hold information. It starts when support starts or during support.

  Specifically, the hold notice effect is executed when the hold information relating to the next game round is acquired at the support start timing of the first electric accessory 41a. On the other hand, the short-time hold notice effect is executed when hold information relating to the next game round is acquired during the support of the first electric accessory 41a.

  In addition, in the hold notice effect, the normal hold notice effect that is selected when the next game time is the winning game time, and the advantageous hold notice effect that is selected when the next game time is a game time out of play, Is set. Similarly, for the short-time hold notice effect, the short-time normal hold notice effect that is selected when the next game time is the winning game time and the short-time advantage that is selected when the next game time is out-of-game time. On-hold notice effect is set.

  Each normal hold notice effect is executed across the support based on a predetermined winning game time and the next game time that is a game time based on the hold information that is the target of the normal hold notice effect. On the other hand, each advantageous hold notice effect is performed only during support based on the predetermined winning game times. This is to prevent each advantageous hold notice effect and the advantageous state effect from being performed simultaneously.

  In the effect control process, one of the various effects is performed according to the command received from the main control device 101 and the status of the hold information stored in the first electric role reservation area 231.

  A specific processing configuration will be described. First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command, specifically, a winning hold command or a miss hold command is received. As already described, the hold command is a command that is set when the first telephone combination counter C1 is acquired. In particular, the winning hold command is a command that is set when the support lottery result using the acquired first electric combination counter C1 is the winning result, and the off hold command is the acquired first electric combination This command is set when the support lottery result using the counter C1 is an outlier result.

  If a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1303. If a hold command has been received, a hold command handling process is executed in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303. In steps S1303 to S1315, processing corresponding to various commands other than the hold command is executed.

  Here, as described above, the hold command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sound emission control device 102 when a winning to the first through gate 51 occurs and the first power counter C1 is acquired. It is what is done. For this reason, depending on the occurrence timing of the winning to the first through gate 51, the hold command and another command may be set in the same normal processing time. For this reason, first, processing related to the pending command is executed, and processing corresponding to another command is executed after the processing is executed, so that no time lag occurs between the pending command handling processing and the handling processing of other commands. It is like that.

  The pending command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, a process for storing the hold command information included in the received hold command in the RAM 244 of the sound emission control device 102 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 244 is provided with a hold command information storage area 261 for storing the hold command information. The hold command information storage area 261 includes four unit storage areas 261a to 261d corresponding to the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric utility reservation area 231, and according to the reception history of the hold command, It is stored in any one of the unit storage areas 261a to 261d. Specifically, when a hold command is received, the hold command information is sequentially stored in the order of the first unit storage area 261a → the second unit storage area 261b → the third unit storage area 261c → the fourth unit storage area 261d. Go. As a result, the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric utility holding area 231 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 101 and the unit storage areas 261a to 261d of the holding command information storage area 261 in the RAM 244 of the sound emission control device 102 are obtained. It is associated.

  The hold command information includes the type of the hold command, specifically, information indicating whether the command is a winning hold command or a miss hold command.

  In a succeeding step S1402, a process for grasping the number of the first electric combination counter C1 currently acquired in the first electric combination holding area 231 is executed. Specifically, a process of incrementing the hold number storage area K provided in the hold command information storage area 261 of the RAM 244 by 1 is executed. The number-of-holds storage area K is for grasping the number of pieces of on-hold information that is the target of various effects, specifically, the number of first electric power counters C1 that are currently acquired, in the sound emission control device 102. .

  After execution of the process of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not the game is being played (the first unit area 71 is being displayed in a variable manner). It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is set in the in-game flag storage area 262 provided in the RAM 244. The in-game flag is a flag that is set when the normal symbol is in a variable display in the first unit area 71. Specifically, the flag is set when a variable command is received. Is a flag that is erased when a message is received.

  If the game is being played, the pending command handling process is terminated as it is. If the game is not being played, whether or not the first electric accessory 41a is being opened (supported) is determined in step S1404. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open flag is set in the open flag storage area 263 provided in the RAM 244. The opening flag is a flag that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is being opened, and is specifically a flag that is set when an opening command is received and is cleared when a closing command is received. is there.

  If the first electric accessory 41a is not open, the hold command response processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the first electric accessory 41a is open, a short-time hold notice is given in steps S1405 to S1415. Processing related to the performance is executed.

  First, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is set in the hold notice flag storage area 264 provided in the RAM 244. The hold notice flag is a flag that is set when a hold notice effect is performed, and is a flag that is erased when a game turn related to the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is started.

  If the hold notice flag is set, it means that the hold notice effect has already been performed. In this case, the pending command handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is not set, processing for starting the short time hold notice effect is executed in steps S1406 to S1414.

  Specifically, first, a hold notice flag is set in step S1406. Thereafter, in step S1407, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is grasped. Specifically, the RAM 244 is provided with a timer counter area 265, and the timer counter area 265 stores a timer counter T for grasping the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. The timer counter T is set to “3000” when the first electric accessory 41a is opened, and is decremented by 1 each time the effect control process is activated. Since the effect control process is activated at a cycle of 2 msec, the timer counter T becomes “0” when 6 sec, which is the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a, has elapsed. In step S1407, by grasping the current value of the timer counter T, the remaining open time from the present time until the first electric accessory 41a is closed is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S1408, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved number storage area K is executed. In step S1409, the information stored in the first unit storage area 261a is stored in the execution area 261e provided in the RAM 244, and the information stored in each of the unit storage areas 261b to 261d is shifted. Let The data shift is the same as the data shift of the execution area AE of the first electric utility reservation area 231 and each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4.

  In subsequent step S1410, the success / failure information related to the support lottery result is grasped from the information stored in the execution area 261e. Then, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current support lottery result is a win based on the grasp information.

  If the support lottery result is winning, it means that the next game time is the winning game time. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1412 to execute a process of selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407. Specifically, a plurality of effect times (for example, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec,..., 5.5 sec, 6.0 sec) are set in advance within a numerical range of 0 to 6.5 sec as the effect time. And one effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time is selected from the plurality of effect times. Specifically, the maximum time within a range smaller than the time obtained by combining the remaining opening time and the winning game time of 0.5 sec is selected from the plurality of performance times. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 2.0 sec is selected as the effect time.

  Thereafter, in step S1413, a short time normal hold notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1412 is started, and the hold command response process is terminated.

  Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 are provided in the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102, and the various data table storage areas 271 have a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to a plurality of types of effects. Is set. In the data table, an audio output pattern and a light control pattern for performing effects are set. In step S1413, a data table corresponding to the short time normal hold notice effect is read out from a plurality of types of data tables.

  Here, a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the short-time normal hold notice effect are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of effect times. In step S1413, a data table corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1408 is read out of the data tables corresponding to the plurality of types of short-time normal hold notice effects, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area. To do. As a result, a sound and light effect corresponding to the short time normal hold notice effect is started.

  Further, in step S1413, an effect command corresponding to the short time normal hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes specification information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1412. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, the display control of the symbol display device 81 is performed such that the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the effect command and the effect time is performed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a data table for displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner on the display screen G. The data table is prepared in advance for a plurality of types corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, and the decorative display variable display mode is different. When the display control device 212 receives an effect command corresponding to the short-time normal hold notice effect, the display control device 212 corresponds to the short-time normal hold notice effect among a plurality of types of data tables and corresponds to the present effect time. The data table is read out, and the short time normal hold notice effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table.

  A specific aspect of the display screen G in the short time normal hold notice effect will be described in detail. When the short-time normal hold notice effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. After that, at the timing before the lapse of the production time, the decorative symbol variation display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and each of the effective lines L1 to L5 is stopped as a result of the stop. It is temporarily displayed in a state where the combination of the off-decoration symbols is slightly swung up. After that, at the timing when the production time elapses, the combination of off-decoration symbols is stopped (confirmed) and the short-time normal holding notice production is finished. Thereby, the player can grasp that the next game time is the winning game time, that is, the player does not shift to the advantageous state. The stop display of the combination of detached decorative symbols is maintained until a new effect is started.

  In this case, the variation display time of the decorative symbol is varied corresponding to the variation of the production time. Specifically, in each data table corresponding to the short-time normal hold notice effect, regardless of each effect time, the time from the temporary display of the off-decoration symbol to the stop display is constant, Corresponding to each effect time, a time until the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed is set from the variation start timing of the decorative symbol. Thereby, regardless of the production time, the time from the temporary display of the off-decorated symbol to the stop display is constant.

  Note that the decorative display variation display mode is arbitrary as long as the decorative symbol variation display is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the combination of out-of-decoration symbols is stopped and displayed at the elapsed time of the performance time. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the combination of the off-decoration symbol is stopped and displayed at the elapse timing of the production time without being temporarily displayed.

  Further, for example, first, a high-speed fluctuation display (low identification fluctuation display) of a decorative pattern is started, and then a low-speed fluctuation display (high identification fluctuation display) having a fluctuation display speed lower than that of the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. It may be configured to display or stop display. In this case, it is preferable that the time during which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed among the both fluctuation displays is shortened according to the remaining open time. Thereby, the production time can be suitably varied while reducing the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

  The same applies to the variable display of decorative symbols in other effects described below.

  On the other hand, if the support lottery result is a miss result, it means that the next game time is a miss game time. In this case, in step S1414, a process of selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, the maximum time within a range smaller than the remaining opening time is selected from the plurality of production times. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 1.5 sec is selected as the effect time.

  Thereafter, in step S1415, a short-time advantageous hold notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1414 is selected, and the hold command response process is terminated. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to the short-time advantageous hold notice effect. A plurality of types of data tables are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of performance times. In step S1415, the sound emission control device 102 reads a data table corresponding to the currently selected effect time, and sets the read data table in the effect execution area.

  Further, in step S1415, an effect command corresponding to the time-saving advantageous hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes specifying information for specifying the effect time selected in step S1414. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, a data table corresponding to the current performance time is read out from a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the short-time advantageous hold notice effect, and the short-time advantageous hold notice effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table. .

  A specific aspect of the display screen G in the short time advantageous hold notice effect will be described in detail. When the short-time advantageous hold notice effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Thereafter, at a timing before the lapse time of the production time, the decorative symbol variation display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5. A combination of jackpot decorative symbols is temporarily displayed on one active line. Thereafter, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols is stopped (determined) at the timing when the production time has elapsed, and the short-time advantageous reservation notice production ends. Thereby, the player can grasp that the next game turn is out of play, that is, shifts to an advantageous state.

  According to such processing, when the hold command information is acquired in a situation where the first electric accessory 41a is being opened and the hold notice effect is not executed, the normal time is reduced based on the acquired hold command information. A hold notice effect or a short-time advantageous hold notice effect is executed.

  In this case, for the short-time normal holding notice effect, a time obtained by combining the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the time related to the game times after the first electric accessory 41a is opened (winning game time). It is ensured as the production time of the short-time normal hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time than the winning game time as the effect time of the short-time normal hold notice effect, and it is possible to diversify the short-time normal hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, with respect to the time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect, the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the time-saving advantage reservation notice effect. As a result, even if the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game time (out-of-game time), the short-time advantageous hold notice effect can be performed.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the said structure, What is necessary is just to be able to ensure at least one part of the remaining open time of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 41a as the production time of a time-short normal hold notice effect or a time-short advantageous hold notice effect. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of these on-hold announcement effects, a configuration that uses the remaining open time to the maximum is better.

  Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), in step S1303, it is determined whether an open command is received. As described above, the opening command is a command that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is opened. If an open command has been received, an open command handling process is executed in step S1304, and the flow advances to step S1315.

  The release command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1501, “3000” is set to the timer counter T.

  In a succeeding step S1502, it is determined whether or not the pending command information stored in the pending command information storage area 261 exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number storage area K is “1” or more. When the value of the number-of-holds storage area K is “1” or more, processing for determining a hold notice effect according to the hold command information stored in the hold command information storage area 261 in steps S1503 to S1509 is performed. Run. In this case, the processing in steps S1503 to S1507 is the same as the processing in steps S1406 and S1408 to S1411 in the pending command handling processing (FIG. 26), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  If the support lottery result of the hold information subject to the current hold notice effect is a win result, that is, if the next game time is the win game time, an affirmative decision is made in step S1507, and a normal hold notice effect is given in step S1508. To end the processing for handling this release command. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to the normal hold notice effect. In step S1508, the data table corresponding to the normal hold notice effect is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1508, an effect command corresponding to the normal hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display command is received, the display control device 212 reads the data table corresponding to the normal hold notice effect from the program ROM 253 and starts the normal hold notice effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

  In each data table corresponding to the normal holding notice effect, a time (6.5 sec) is set as the effect time, which is the sum of the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game time (0.5 sec). Has been. That is, the normal hold notice effect is performed over the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on a predetermined winning game number and the next game time (winning game number).

  In addition, since the specific aspect of the display screen G in the normal hold notice effect is the same as that of the short time normal hold notice effect except that the display time of the decorative symbol varies, the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if the support lottery result of the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice effect this time is a missed result, that is, if the next game time is a missed game time, a negative determination is made in step S1507, and advantageous hold in step S1509 A notice effect is started and the processing for opening command is completed. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to advantageous hold notice effects. In step S1509, the data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1509, an effect command corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display command is received, the display control device 212 reads the data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect from the program ROM 253 and starts the advantageous hold notice effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

  In each data table corresponding to the advantageous hold notice effect, the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a is set as the effect time. That is, the advantageous hold notice effect is performed only while the first electric accessory 41a is open based on a predetermined winning game number.

  In addition, since the specific aspect of the display screen G in the advantageous reservation notice effect is the same as that of the short-time advantageous reservation notice effect except that the decorative symbol change display time is different, the description is omitted.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation where the hold command information related to the next game round is stored in the hold command information storage area 261, when the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game round is started, A hold notice effect (normal hold notice effect or advantageous hold notice effect) corresponding to the hold command information (support lottery result) is executed. In this case, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game times is ensured as an effect time of the holding notice effect. Thereby, a reservation notice effect can be performed suitably.

  That is, for the normal holding notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game times and the time of the next game time (winning game times) are ensured as the effect time of the normal holding notice effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the normal holding notice effect as much as the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a.

  On the other hand, for the advantageous hold notice effect, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is secured as the effect time of the advantageous hold notice effect. Thereby, even if the effect during the advantageous state is performed at the next game time (out-of-game time), the advantageous hold notice effect can be performed.

  In particular, the production time of each hold notice effect is longer than the effect time of each hour short notice effect. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect as compared with the short-time hold notice effect.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the said structure, What is necessary is just to be able to ensure at least one part of the opening time of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 41a as the production time of each said hold notice effect. For example, the production time of the normal holding notice effect may be shorter than the combined time of the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning game time. In addition, the production time of the advantageous hold notice effect may be shorter than the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. However, in view of ensuring the diversity of the above-described holding notice effects, it is better to ensure the entire opening time of the first electric accessory 41a as the effect time.

  Incidentally, when the value of the number-of-holds storage area K is not “1” or more (step S1504: NO), this release command response processing is ended as it is. In this case, a new effect is not performed until the short-time hold notice effect based on the acquisition of the hold information related to the next game time is performed, and the stop result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the previous game time is continuously displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, a predetermined effect may be provided over the support of the first electric accessory 41a. In this case, when the hold information related to the next game round is acquired during the predetermined effect, the effect may be switched so that the short-time hold notice effect is started instead of the predetermined effect.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect that is continuous with the short-time hold notice effect may be used. Thereby, the discomfort given to the player when switching to the short-time hold notice effect can be reduced.

  Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if no release command has been received, the process advances to step S1305 to determine whether or not a change command (winning change command or missed change command) has been received. As described above, the change command is transmitted when the normal symbol change display is started in the first unit area 71. If a variable command has been received, a variable command handling process is executed in step S1306, and the flow advances to step S1315.

  The variable command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, the type of variable command is grasped. Specifically, it is ascertained whether the received fluctuation command is a winning fluctuation command or a deviation fluctuation command. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is a winning command.

  If it is a winning change command, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not a pending notice flag is set.

  If the hold notice flag is not set, a hold notice effect or a short-time hold notice effect is executed based on the hold information (first electric role counter C1) triggered by the current winning game time (winning change command setting). Means not. In this case, in step S1604 to step S1606, processing related to the normal time effect is executed.

  Here, the hold notice effect or the short-time hold notice effect is when the hold information related to the next game round is acquired before the opening (support) of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game round is completed. Is to be done. For this reason, a negative determination in step S1603 can be said that the current winning game times are discontinuous with the opening of the first electric combination 41a, and the short time normal performance is the opening of the first electric combination 41a. It can be said that it will be executed in non-continuous winning game times.

  Specifically, the processing related to the short time normal effect is first executed in steps S1604 and S1605. Since these processes are the same as those already described, description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S1606, a time-short normal effect is started, and the processing for responding to the fluctuation command is terminated. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and a program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to short-time normal effects. In step S1606, the data table corresponding to the short time normal effect is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1606, processing for transmitting an effect command corresponding to the normal time effect to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 253 a data table for displaying the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the short time normal effect on the display screen G based on the effect command, and the read data table. The short-time normal effect is started on the display screen G according to

  A specific aspect of the display screen G in the short time normal effect will be described in detail. When the short time normal effect is started, the decorative symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily hidden. After that, it is immediately displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 in a state where the combination of the decorative symbols is slightly swung. Thereafter, at the timing when the production time elapses, the combination of off-decoration symbols is stopped (confirmed) and the short-time normal production ends.

  Here, in each data table corresponding to the short time normal effect stored in the sound emission control device 102 and the display control device 212, the same time (0.5 sec) as the winning game time is set as the effect time. . That is, the short time normal effect is an effect performed over the winning game times.

  On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is set, it means that the normal hold notice effect or the short time normal hold notice effect is being performed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1607, the pending notice flag is deleted, and the process for dealing with the fluctuation command is terminated.

  That is, when the opening of the first electric combination 41a and the game times are continuous, the hold notice effect or the short-time hold notice effect for the hold information of the next game time is released while the first electric combination 41a is opened. Executed.

  In this case, when the hold information (and the hold command information corresponding thereto) has already been acquired at the opening timing of the first electric accessory 41a, the entire opening time of the first electric accessory 41a is the holding notice effect. Secured as stage time. On the other hand, when the hold information is acquired while the first electric combination 41a is being opened, the remaining opening time of the first electric combination 41a is secured as the effect time of the short-time hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the case where the opening of the first electric accessory 41a and the game times are discontinuous (except between the off game times and the winning game times) and the game times are the winning game times. The short-time normal performance is performed over the winning game times.

  On the other hand, if the received fluctuation command is not a winning fluctuation command (step S1602: NO determination), it means that a deviation fluctuation command has been received. In this case, in step S1608, the deviation fluctuation display time is grasped from the specific information included in the deviation fluctuation command.

  Thereafter, processing for displaying the remaining advantageous time is executed in step S1609. Specifically, as the remaining advantageous time, a specific command in which the deviation fluctuation display time grasped in the previous step S1608 is set is transmitted to the display control device 212. Based on the reception of the specific command, the display control device 212 displays the deviation fluctuation display time on the display screen G and starts to count down the deviation fluctuation display time. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with a count display timer counter for measuring time. Based on the reception of the specific command, the display control device 212 sets a value corresponding to the deviation display time in the count display timer counter, and updates the count display timer counter by 1 at a predetermined cycle. . This makes it possible to grasp the remaining advantageous time based on the count display timer counter. The remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G is updated each time the count display timer counter is updated, or once for a plurality of updates.

  After execution of the process of step S1609, the effect during the advantageous state is started in step S1610, and the process for dealing with the fluctuation command is ended. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to the advantageous state effects. In step S1610, the data table corresponding to the advantageous state effect is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1610, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the effect during the advantageous state to display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads from the program ROM 253 a data table for causing a series of movies corresponding to the advantageous state effect to be performed on the display screen G based on the effect command, and according to the read data table. The movie is reproduced on the display screen G.

  The movie playback time is set to 90 sec, for example, and the movie is repeatedly played until the ending is started (until the advantageous state ends).

  Returning to the description of the effect control process (FIG. 25), if a variation command has not been received, the process advances to step S1307 to determine whether a count stop command has been received. As already described, the count stop command is set when the support (opening / closing operation) of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started.

  If the count stop command has been received, the count stop process is executed in step S1308, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the count stop process, it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G. If the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, the remaining advantageous time is counted down. Execute the process for pausing.

  Specifically, a process of transmitting the count stop command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 confirms that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down based on the reception of the count stop command. When it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down, the update of the count display timer counter is prohibited, and the remaining advantageous time at that time is blinked.

  On the other hand, if no count stop command has been received, the process advances to step S1309 to determine whether a count restart command has been received. As already described, the count restart command is set when the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is completed.

  If the count restart command has been received, the count restart process is executed in step S1310, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the count restart process, it is confirmed on the display screen G that the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused. If the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is paused. Execute the process to cancel.

  Specifically, a process of transmitting the count restart command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. Based on the reception of the count restart command, the display control device 212 cancels the prohibition of updating the count display timer counter, and lights the remaining advantageous time.

  According to such a configuration, the remaining advantageous time is not counted down, specifically, the count display timer counter is not updated during the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. Thereby, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G and the deviation fluctuation display time in the main control device 101 can be synchronized.

  In addition, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main control device 101 periodically transmits a command in which information on the deviation variation display time is set to the display control device 212 via the sound emission control device 102. It is good.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which provides a real-time clock in the display control apparatus 212, and grasps | ascertains time by the said real-time clock. In short, the deviation fluctuation display time can be grasped, the deviation fluctuation display time is displayed in a countdown manner, and the countdown display is stopped during the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. If so, the specific processing is arbitrary.

  If the count restart command has not been received, the process advances to step S1311 to determine whether an ending command has been received. As described above, the ending command is a command that is set when the advantageous state ends.

  If an ending command has been received, ending is started in step S1312, and the process proceeds to step S1315. Specifically, various data table storage areas 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 respectively store data tables corresponding to the ending. In step S1312, the data table corresponding to the ending is read from the various data table storage areas 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1312, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the ending to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads from the program ROM 253 a data table for causing an ending movie corresponding to the ending to be performed on the display screen G based on the effect command, and displays the ending movie according to the read data table. Play on screen G. The playback time of the ending movie is set to 2 sec.

  If an ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1313 to determine whether it is the ending end timing. If it is the ending end timing, the process proceeds to step S1314, a hold notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In the hold notice effect determination process, the process from step S1503 to step S1509 of the release command response process (FIG. 27) is executed. As a result, when the hold command information relating to the next game round is acquired, the hold notice effect is executed. The hold notice effect corresponds to the hold information that triggered the variable display in the first unit area 71 after the standby time has elapsed.

  In step S1315, other processing based on reception of other commands is executed. The other processes include a light emission control process when a command related to each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 is received, and a process of setting and deleting various flags such as a game-in-progress flag and an open flag. Then, after executing the process of step S1315, the pending command handling process ends.

<Relationship between game flow and various effects and display mode displayed on display screen G>
Next, the relationship between the game flow and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 (a) shows the winning to the first through gate 51, FIG. 29 (b) shows the presence / absence of the variable display of the first unit area 71, and FIG. 29 (c) shows the support of the first electric accessory 41a. FIG. 29 (d) shows the execution timing of the short time normal effect, FIG. 29 (e) shows the execution timing of the normal hold notice effect, and FIG. 29 (f) shows the execution timing of the short time advantage hold notice effect. FIG. 29 (g) shows the execution timing of the effect during the advantageous state, FIG. 29 (h) shows the opening / closing mode of the second electric accessory 42a, and FIG. 29 (i) shows the ending execution timing.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the display screen G at each timing. Specifically, FIG. 30A is a timing at t33, FIG. 30B is a timing at t35, and FIG. (C) is timing t36, FIG. 30 (d) is timing t37, FIG. 30 (e) is timing t38, FIG. 30 (f) is timing t39, and FIG. 30 (g) is a display screen at timing t41. The display mode of G is shown. In FIGS. 30E to 30G, a movie is actually played back, but for convenience of explanation, display of the movie image is omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), a prize is awarded to the first through gate 51 at a timing t31 when the game is not being played and the support of each electric accessory 41a to 43a is not performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a game round (a normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71) is started. This game time is a winning game time.

  In addition, at the timing of t31, since the support of each electric accessory 41a to 43a is not performed during the game play, the winning game turn is started almost simultaneously with winning the first through gate 51. Therefore, the hold command information and the winning variation command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 almost simultaneously. In this case, the pending command handling process is performed before the variable command handling process.

  Specifically, after 1 is added to the hold number storage area K and the hold command information is stored in the first unit storage area 261a of the hold command information storage area 261, the hold number storage area K is subtracted by 1 and stored above. The pending command information is stored in the execution area 261e. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the normal time effect is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t32, a winning to the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric power counter C1 is acquired. As a result, a hold command is transmitted from main controller 101 and hold command information is stored in hold command information storage area 261. The first electric power counter C1 acquired this time corresponds to the winning value. In other words, the next game time is the winning game time.

  As already described, when a hold command is received during game play, the short-time hold notice effect is not executed (see step S1403 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 26)). For this reason, the short time normal effect and the short time hold notice effect do not occur at the same time.

  At the timing of t33, the winning game round is finished and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started (see FIG. 29C). Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened. In this case, a release command is transmitted, and a release command handling process is executed. As a result, the next game round, specifically the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold command information acquired at the timing of t32, specifically the normal hold notice effect, is executed, as shown in FIG. 30 (a). The decorative symbol variation display is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, the support of the first electric accessory 41a is completed at the timing t34 when the opening time (6 sec) of the first electric accessory 41a has elapsed. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, game times based on the hold information acquired at the timing of t32, specifically, winning game times are started. After that, at the timing of t35 when the normal symbol winning variation display time in the first unit region 71 has elapsed, the winning game round ends and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started.

  Here, since the production time of the normal holding notice effect is set to the time that combines the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a and the winning variation display time, the normal holding notice effect is given at the timing of t35. finish. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the combination of the off decoration symbols is stopped and displayed.

  At the timing t36, a winning to the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric power counter C1 is acquired. The first electric power counter C1 corresponds to an outlier. Based on the acquisition of the first electric role counter C1, a hold command relating to the next game round is transmitted. In this case, since the first electric accessory 41a is being opened, a short-time hold notice effect, specifically, a short-time advantageous hold notice effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the decorative symbol variation display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The effect time of the short-time advantageous hold notice effect is set to a time slightly shorter than the remaining opening time of the first electric accessory 41a.

  Thereafter, the short-time advantageous hold notice effect ends at the timing of t37, which is slightly before the timing of t38 when the first electric accessory 41a is closed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), the combination of the jackpot decoration symbol is stopped and displayed on one effective line (specifically, the right-downward line L4). Thereby, it can be grasped that the state is shifted to the advantageous state, specifically, that the next game time is off and the game time is off.

  Then, at the timing of t38, the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the off game time is started.

  According to this configuration, when the opening of the first electric combination 41a based on a predetermined winning game number and the next game time are continuous, the next game time is determined using the opening time of the first electric combination item 41a. Hold notice effect related to is performed. As a result, it is possible to ensure the production time for the game times longer than the game time, and to diversify the effects for the game times.

  Here, it is preferable to set the game time to be short in order to smoothly advance the game. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the winning game times are performed more frequently than the off-game times, the game can be smoothly progressed by setting the winning game time to be shorter than the off-game time. it can. However, if the winning game times are set short, the effects related to the game times performed on the display screen G, in detail, the types of variable display modes of decorative symbols are limited, and the degree of attention to decorative symbol variable displays decreases. There is a risk.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the effects relating to the winning game times (various normal holding notice effects) are started during support based on the winning game times executed at a timing prior to the winning game times. The As a result, it is possible to secure an effect time for performing an effect related to the winning game times, and thus it is possible to shorten the winning game time time while ensuring diversification of effects related to the winning game times. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the winning game times while smoothly progressing the game.

  In addition, at the timing of t38, a deviation variation command is transmitted, and the effect during the advantageous state is started based on the deviation variation command. Specifically, the movie is repeatedly reproduced on the display screen G.

  Further, based on the start of the effect during the advantageous state, the display of the remaining advantageous time is started as shown in FIG. The remaining advantageous time is counted down with the deviation fluctuation display time as an initial value.

  Thereafter, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started at the timing of t39, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30F, the remaining advantageous time at the temporary stop timing is displayed in a blinking manner. Note that the state of blinking is indicated by an underline in relation to the drawings.

  Then, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is completed at the timing of t40, the remaining advantageous time countdown is resumed.

  At the timing of t41, the off-game game ends. In this case, the countdown is completed, and a message indicating that the remaining advantageous time is “0” is displayed as shown in FIG.

  Although illustration is omitted, normal symbol variation display is performed in the second unit region 72 at the timing t41 (end timing of the off-game game). For this reason, the production during the advantageous state is continued as it is. The normal symbol variation display in the third unit region 73 is not performed.

  Thereafter, the support of the second electric accessory 42a based on the normal symbol variation display in the second unit region 72 is started, and when the support ends at the timing t42, the advantageous state ends. In this case, the effect during the advantageous state is finished and the ending movie is played back.

  Subsequently, when the ending movie ends at the timing of t43, the hold notice effect is started. The on-hold notice effect is based on the next game round, and more specifically on the on-hold command information stored in the first unit storage area 261a in the on-hold command information storage area 261. When the next game time is the winning game time, a normal hold notice effect is executed.

  Then, the standby time elapses at the timing of t44, and the normal hold notice effect ends.

  That is, the waiting time (8 sec) is set to a time that is a sum of the ending effect time (2 sec) and the hold notice effect effect time (6 sec). Thus, during the standby time, it is possible to perform the ending and the hold notice effect corresponding to the next game time with respect to the off game time.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, a configuration without an ending may be used. As a result, the time between the off-game time and the next game time can be shortened. Therefore, a game can be smoothly advanced.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with a holding notice effect and performs a time-short holding notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to further shorten the time between the missed game times and the next game times. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with an advance notice effect and performs a time-short normal effect in the next game time with respect to a miss game time. In this case, the time required for the hold notice effect can be omitted, and the time between the off-game time and the next game time can be further reduced. However, in view of the diversity of effects related to the next game time with respect to the out-of-game time, it is preferable to set a longer time between the out-of-game time and the next game time.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The unit areas 71 to 73 can be displayed in a variable manner independently. When the winning change display is completed in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are displayed. The variable display is reset, and thereafter, the new variable display is not started in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a novel game in which each support lottery is performed independently, and each support lottery result is related.

  In addition, when the winning variation display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is ended, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit regions is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, the winning variation display is performed. The above-described count is resumed based on the end of support. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of support for another electric accessory during the support of one electric accessory while using the support lottery result and the variable display time until suspension.

  Furthermore, when the outlier variation display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is completed, the variation display time count in the variation display of the other unit regions is not temporarily stopped. Thereby, attention can be paid to the variable display of other unit areas, and the variable display of each unit area can be focused stepwise.

  Further, the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set shorter than the variation display times of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, and the outlier variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set to the second unit region 72. And it set longer than the fluctuation display time of the 3rd unit field 73. As a result, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the first electric accessory 41a is given priority over the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. On the other hand, when the deviation fluctuation display is performed in the first unit region 71, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is preferentially performed. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to determine which support is preferentially performed according to the variable display mode of the first unit region 71.

  By passing through each of the through gates 51 to 53, a normal symbol variation display is performed independently in each of the unit regions 71 to 73, and after passing through the first through gate 51, the second through gate. These positional relationships were set so as to pass through 52 or the third through gate 53. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game that actively performs an event in which the change display of the first unit area 71 and the change display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 occur simultaneously.

  In such a configuration, the regulation nail 64 b is provided so that the game ball does not pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. Thereby, it is possible to avoid an event in which only the variation display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is performed, and the simultaneous variation display can be suitably performed.

  Furthermore, since the start timing of the variable display of the first unit area 71 is likely to be earlier than the start timing of the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the winning change display of the first unit area 71 is displayed. It is easier to end the display before the variable display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Thereby, the support of the first electric combination 41a can be given priority over the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a.

  During the support of the first electric accessory 41a, it is configured so as to notify whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, specifically, a hold notice effect that notifies the support lottery result that triggered the next game round. As a result, it is possible to ensure the production time of the production related to the game times longer than the game time, so that it is possible to diversify the productions for notifying the support lottery result.

  In particular, if the game time is shortened from the viewpoint of improving the game digestion rate, the production time of the effects related to the game times tends to be short. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to secure the production time for the game times longer than the game time, and thus diversify the effects for the game times while increasing the game's digestibility. Can be achieved.

  When the game time is a winning game time, the first electric accessory 41a is supported after the winning game time is completed, and the first unit area 71 is supported during the support of the first electric accessory 41a. The new variation display is not started. In this case, a time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a may inevitably occur between a predetermined game time and the next game time. In such a configuration, the hold notice effect is configured to be performed across the time related to the support and the game turn time, and thus the time that can be inevitably generated can be suitably used. Thereby, the reservation notice effect can be performed by suitably using the time related to the support of the first electric accessory 41a.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the advantageous state is a state in which the deviation variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, so that the effect relating to the game times starts the deviation variation display in the first unit area 71. It is necessary to start at a timing earlier than that. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the various hold notice effects as effects related to the game times are performed using the support time ahead of the game times related to the hold information that is the effect target. It has become. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the game times before the deviation variation display is performed. Therefore, it can be avoided that the effect relating to the game times is rendered meaningless by performing the effect relating to the game times after the transition to the advantageous state.

  The second electric combination winning port 42 and the third electric combination winning port 43 are provided, and are configured such that the winning frequency for both differs depending on the game ball firing mode. Specifically, the second power combination winning port 42 and the third power combination winning port 43 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the game which changes the firing mode of a game ball according to which support is performed will be performed. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In this configuration, the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a are configured to open for a short time and then open for a long time based on the start of support. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain this support object by confirming that opening was performed for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the second electric role winning port 42 and the third electric role winning port 43.

  In particular, the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is terminated based on the combination of the short time opening and the long time opening being the upper limit opening time. In this case, since the opening for the notification of the classification is a short time opening, a long opening time can be secured. Thereby, it is possible to suitably perform the notification by using the electric accessory while ensuring the player's profit.

  In addition, the benefit provided to the player is greater when the support lottery result using the first electronic role counter C1 is a missed result. Specifically, when the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is performed, the support of the first electric combination 41a based on the winning variation display is the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a. The configuration is such that the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is supported during the display of the fluctuation of the first unit area 71 in a priority manner over the support. And the privilege given to a player by the support of the 2nd electric combination 42a or the 3rd electric combination 43a is larger than the support of the 1st electric combination 41a. Thereby, unexpectedness can be given to a game.

  In particular, since the out-of-range variation display time of the first unit area 71 is an advantageous time, and the advantageous state ends when the advantageous time has elapsed, the player can play the second electric role within the advantageous time. The support of the object 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is to be generated more times. Thereby, it is possible to increase the game's digestibility by encouraging the player's happiness.

  Further, the deviation fluctuation display time (advantageous time) of the first unit area 71 is varied. As a result, the number of times of support of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a fluctuates in the first unit area 71, so that when the player performs the out-of-range change display of the first unit area 71, this time It is assumed that attention is paid to the out-of-range fluctuation display time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the out-of-range variation display of the first unit region 71.

  In particular, the display screen G is configured to perform a countdown display of the deviation variation display time. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the remaining advantageous time.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the game board, the lottery, and the variation start process are different. The different points will be described below. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  First, the game board 300 in this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. 31A is a front view of the game board 300, FIG. 31B is a schematic sectional view of the first variable winning device 301, and FIG. 31C is a schematic sectional view of the second variable winning device 302.

  A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a range defined as a game area in the game board 300 by performing router processing as in the first embodiment. In each opening, a first variable winning device 301, a second variable winning device 302, an upper operating port 303 corresponding to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, the second through gate 52 in the first embodiment, or the second A lower operation port 304 corresponding to the three through gates 53, a variable display unit 305, a main display unit 306, and the like are provided. A nail 307 is provided in the game area.

  When the first variable winning device 301, the second variable winning device 302, the upper operation port 303, and the lower operation port 304 enter the ball (winning), it is detected by a detection sensor disposed on the back side of the game board 300 ( And a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 303 and when a ball enters the lower working port 304, three prize balls are paid out, and the first variable winning device 301 is entered. When a ball is generated and when a ball enters the second variable winning device 302, payout of 15 prize balls is executed. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 303 and 304 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 304 than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 303. It may be different. Further, for example, the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 302 is larger than the number of winning balls according to the first variable winning device 301, or the first variable winning device 301 than the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 302. The number of prize balls of both variable prize-winning apparatuses 301 and 302 may be different, such that the number of prize balls related to is large.

  Both the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 304 are opened upward. The two operation ports 303 and 304 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 303 is on the upper side. The operation ports 303 and 304 are arranged at the center of the game area and below the variable display unit 305. A guide nail 307a is provided for guiding the game ball toward each of the operation ports 303 and 304 by colliding with the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27. In this case, the expected degree of winning in each of the operation ports 303 and 304 does not differ according to the arrival position of the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 in the upper part of the game area. In other words, it is not possible to aim at a game ball and launch it so that a winning at one operating port occurs at a higher frequency than a winning at the other operating port.

  Here, the variable display unit 305 is provided with a center frame 305a, and the center frame 305a is provided with a stage 305b in which a guide passage 305c is formed. Both working ports 303 and 304 are disposed below the outlet portion of the guide passage 305c. That is, the outlet portion of the guide passage 305c, the upper operation port 303, and the lower operation port 304 are arranged in this order from the upper side to the lower side (toward the flow direction of the game ball). Thereby, the game ball led out from the exit portion of the guide passage 305c can easily enter the upper operation port 303. Due to the guide passage 305 c, the winning frequency for the upper operating port 303 is higher than the winning frequency for the lower operating port 304.

  The main display unit 306 includes a first result display unit 306 a for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 303, and the internal performed based on the winning to the lower working port 304. A second result display unit 306b for specifying the lottery result is set. In addition to the above result display units 306a and 306b, when the main display unit 306 is in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the round game (or the open / close execution mode), the round game in the open / close execution mode is displayed. A round display section for clearly indicating the number of times may be provided.

  In the first result display unit 306a, the variation display of the specific symbol (specific pattern) is performed with the winning of the upper operation port 303 as a trigger, and the variation display is performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 303 as a stop result. The displayed internal lottery result is clearly indicated on the display. When the internal lottery result based on the winning to the upper working port 303 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the specific stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a and the variable display is stopped. After that, the mode shifts to the first opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display unit 306b, a variation display of a picture (specific symbol) is performed with a winning at the lower operation port 304 as a trigger, and the variation display is performed based on a winning at the lower operation port 304 as a stop result. The internal lottery result is clearly indicated by the display. When the internal lottery result based on the winning to the lower operating port 304 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the specific result of stoppage is displayed on the second result display unit 306b and the variable display is stopped. After that, the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that the main display unit 306 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 306, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  Based on the winning at the upper operating port 303, the variable display is started on the main display unit 306 and the symbol display device 81, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Equivalent to times.

  A first holding lamp portion 311 corresponding to the first result display portion 306a is provided in the lower left region on the front side of the center frame 305a. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 303 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 311 is turned on. Further, on the lower right side on the front side of the center frame 305a, a second holding lamp unit 312 corresponding to the second result display unit 306b is provided. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operation port 304 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 312 is turned on.

  The first variable winning device 301 provided above the variable display unit 305 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is the back side of the game board 300 as shown in FIG. And a first open / close door 301b that opens and closes the first big prize opening 301a.

  The first opening / closing door 301b is connected to a first variable winning drive unit 301c provided integrally as the first variable winning device 301 (the connection portions are not shown). The first variable winning drive unit 301c is electrically connected to the main controller 101, and the first opening / closing door 301b is closed (closed) and opened based on a drive signal from the main controller 101. It is placed in either (open state). Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot be won, and the game ball can be won when winning the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 303. It can be switched to the open state.

  The first variable winning device 301 has a first passing portion 301d at a position where a game ball that has won the first variable winning device 301 through the first big winning opening 301a always passes. The winning detection sensor 301e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the first passage unit 301d. The game balls won in the first variable winning device 301 are individually detected by the winning detection sensor 301e. The winning detection sensor 301e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 301e is output to the main control device 101.

  The second variable winning device 302 provided below the variable display unit 305 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is the back side of the game board 300 as shown in FIG. 31 (c). And a second open / close door 302b for opening and closing the second big prize opening 302a.

  The second opening / closing door 302b is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 302c provided integrally as the second variable winning device 302 (the connection portions are not shown). The second variable winning drive unit 302c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the second open / close door 302b is set to either the closed state or the open state based on the drive signal from the main control device 101. Arrange. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot be won, and the game ball can be won when winning the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery based on the win to the lower operation port 304 It can be switched to the open state. That is, the variable winning device that performs the opening / closing operation differs between the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 302 has a second passing portion 302d formed at a position where a game ball that has won the second variable winning device 302 through the second large winning opening 302a always passes. A winning detection sensor 302e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the second passage portion 302d. The game balls won in the second variable winning device 302 are individually detected by the winning detection sensor 302e. The winning detection sensor 302e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 302e is output to the main control device 101.

  Here, the first variable winning device 301 is configured not to win. Specifically, a plurality of regulation nails 307b for regulating winning to the first variable winning device 301 are provided in the game area. The regulation nail 307b is provided so as to cover the first big prize opening 301a from the original side in the flow direction of the game ball, specifically from above, and the distance between the adjacent regulation nails 307b is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller than. Thereby, even if the 1st opening-and-closing door 301b will be in an open state, the winning to the 1st big winning opening 301a will not generate | occur | produce.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 202 uses various counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 306, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the jackpot used for the jackpot occurrence lottery Random number counter C11, big hit type counter C12 used when determining big hit types such as multi-round results and small round results with different round numbers, and random number initial value counter CINI used for setting initial values of big hit random number counter C11 And a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the deviation fluctuation display time of the main display unit 306.

  Each of the counters C11, C12, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 321 including a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, a first execution area AE1, and a second execution area AE2. In the reserved ball storage area 321, the values of the big hit random number counter C <b> 11 and the big hit type counter C <b> 12 are stored in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304. It is like that.

  Each area will be described in detail. The first holding area Ra is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in time series in accordance with the winning histories of the game balls to the upper operation port 303. The second holding area Rb is a holding area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operation port 304.

  The first reserved area Ra is composed of four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4, and a first reserved number storage area RaN. With the four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper working port 303 are held and stored. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 303 is continuously generated a plurality of times, each numerical information is time-sequentially in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4. It will be stored in.

  The first reserved number storage area RaN is a storage area for storing the number of used areas, that is, the number of game balls that have been placed in the upper operation port 303 and held. Specifically, the first hold number storage area RaN stores any numerical value from 0 to 4, and by holding the numerical value, the winning history to the upper operating port 303 is stored and stored. Know how many are there.

  The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the first reserved area Ra when starting the variable display of the first result display unit 306a of the main display unit 306. At the start of the variable display of the first result display unit 306a, whether or not it is determined is made based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

  The second reserved area Rb is composed of four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4, and a second reserved number storage area RbN. Since these configurations are the same as those of the first reserved area Ra and the first reserved number storage area RaN, description thereof is omitted.

  The second execution area AE2 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb when the variable display of the second result display unit 306b of the main display unit 306 is started. At the start of the variable display of the second result display unit 306b, whether or not it is determined is made based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C11 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C11 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C11 and is periodically updated (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C11 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 321 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303 or the lower operation port 304. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303, and is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 304. .

  Here, the winning value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined in advance. Specifically, two values are set as outliers, and numerical values excluding these outliers are set as winning values. That is, the winning result of the jackpot lottery is 598/600. In addition, the value and number of outliers are arbitrary.

  The big hit type counter C12 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. The big hit type counter C12 is periodically updated, stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303, and the second holding area at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 304. Stored in Rb.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a multi-round result and a small round result with different numbers of round games are set, and the jackpot type counter C12 distributes to any of the above round results. Used for. In the round game, the variable winning devices 301 and 302 are opened and closed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the round game, (A) the opening time of each of the big winning openings 301a, 302a becomes a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 10 sec), or (B) to each of the big winning openings 301a, 302a. Is a game that continues until one of the predetermined upper limit numbers (for example, 10) is established.

  Here, only the small round result is set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode, while the multi-round result and the small round result are set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode. And are set. When shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode, the big hit type counter C12 is used to distribute to either the multi-round result or the small round result.

  The allocation destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the ROM 203 as a sorting table. The distribution table is a table set so that the value of the big hit type counter C12 and the distribution destination are uniquely determined. Specifically, “0 to 28” of the jackpot type counter C12 corresponds to the small round result, and “29” corresponds to the multi round result. This numerical value distribution is arbitrary.

<Various processes executed by main controller 101>
Next, various processes executed by the main controller 101 in this embodiment will be described below.

  Various processes in the present embodiment are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Specifically, when a winning to the upper operating port 303 is detected in the timer interrupt process, the current values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 are determined from the empty areas of the first reserved area Ra. Store for the first area. Then, the pending command information is set based on the acquired jackpot random number counter C11.

  On the other hand, when a winning to the lower operation port 304 is detected, the current values of the big hit random number counter C11 and the big hit type counter C12 are stored in the first area among the empty areas of the second reserved area Rb. To do.

  Further, in the normal process, based on the hold information stored in each hold area Ra, Rb, the big win lottery and the change display of the specific symbol in each result display unit 306a, 306b of the main display unit 306 are independent. Let me do it. The jackpot lottery corresponds to the support lottery in the first embodiment, and the variation display of the specific symbol in each result display unit 306a, 306b corresponds to the variation display of the normal symbol in each unit area 71 to 73 in the first embodiment. To do.

  In addition, when the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is a win result, a stop result corresponding to the win result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a after the variable display time has elapsed. Then, after the change display is finished, the mode is shifted to the first opening / closing execution mode. In the first opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed once or a plurality of times. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode is the small round result, the round game is executed only once. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode is a multi-round result, the round game is executed only three times over a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 sec). . In the round game in the first opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing operation is executed with respect to the first big winning opening 301a.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is a win result, a stop result corresponding to the win result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b after the variable display time has elapsed. After the change display is ended, the mode is shifted to the second opening / closing execution mode. In the second opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed only once. In the round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing operation is executed for the second big prize opening 302a.

  As described above, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first grand prize opening 301a, it is not possible to win a game ball to the first big prize opening 301a, while the game ball to the second big prize opening 302a being opened. Is acceptable. For this reason, in the first opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult to give a privilege to the player, while in the second opening / closing execution mode, a privilege is easily given to the player. The first opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the support of the first electric combination 41a in the first embodiment, and the second opening / closing execution mode is the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment. Respond to support.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the second opening / closing execution mode being performed (the winning variation display is terminated in the second result display unit 306b), the variation display time measurement related to the first result display unit 306a is measured. Is temporarily stopped, and based on the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, the measurement of the variable display time is resumed from the paused state.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the first opening / closing execution mode is performed (the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a is terminated), the variation display of the specific symbol in the second result display unit 306b and the timing of the variation display The large jackpot lottery result is reset, and the variation display of a new specific symbol is not started until the first opening / closing execution mode ends.

  With these configurations, the playability shown in the first embodiment can be realized.

  Here, in this embodiment, as already described, the winning order to the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 is random. Even in this case, the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a based on the winning to the upper working port 303 is earlier than the outlier variation display of the second result display unit 306b based on the winning to the lower working port 304. It is configured so as to be easily finished. The specific configuration will be described below.

<First special figure change start processing>
First, the first special figure variation start process executed in the first special figure corresponding process related to the display control of the first result display unit 306a will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the first special figure variation start process is specified by the first result display unit 306a in the first special figure corresponding process. This is executed when it is specified to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, the first special figure variation start process is not in each open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the variation of the specific symbol, and the first result display unit 306a displays the outlier result. This is executed when there is no medium and the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra (RaN> 0).

  First, in step S1701, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the first reserved number storage area RaN is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1702, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra for variable display is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  Then, the data stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the first reserved area Ra is shifted. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted to the lower area such as second area Ra2 → first area Ra1, third area Ra3 → second area Ra2, and fourth area Ra4 → third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the first execution area AE1 matches a predetermined outlier.

  In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S1703 is a big win. If the jackpot is won, in step S1705, the jackpot type allocation determination is executed. Specifically, the value of the big hit type counter C12 is grasped from the information stored in the first execution area AE1. Then, the jackpot result corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C12 acquired this time is grasped by referring to the distribution table. Specifically, it is determined which of the multi-round result and the small round result is won.

  In a succeeding step S1706, processing for setting the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is executed. Specifically, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 sec) is set as the winning fluctuation display time of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, “125” is set in the first variation display time counter Tx provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The first variation display time counter Tx is updated so that 1 is subtracted when the first result display unit 306a is performing variation display and is not in the second opening / closing execution mode in the first special figure corresponding processing. Since the first special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14) as already described, the first variable display time counter Tx is displayed in the first result display unit 306a as a variable display. When the second open / close execution mode is not performed in the situation where the operation is performed, 1 is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec, which is the execution cycle of the normal process. The MPU 202 grasps that the variable display time has elapsed based on the first variable display time counter Tx becoming “0”, and executes a process of ending the variable display in the first result display unit 306a.

  Thereafter, in step S1707, a winning change command is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big win, in step S1708, a deviation fluctuation display time of the first result display unit 306a is determined. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS at the present time is acquired, and the outlier fluctuation display time is grasped by referring to the first table TD1 described in the first embodiment.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 33B, the first table TD1 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is associated with the outlier variation display time. Similar to the first embodiment, the first table TD1 is set with different deviation fluctuation display times depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In step S1708, the variation display time corresponding to the variation type counter CS acquired by referring to the first table TD1 is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped variation display time is obtained for the first variation display time counter Tx. To set.

  Thereafter, in step S1709, a deviation fluctuation command including information for specifying the deviation fluctuation display time is set, and the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, the first result display unit 306a starts displaying the variation of the specific symbol. Then, the first special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Second special figure change start process>
Next, the second special figure variation start process executed in the second special figure corresponding process related to the display control of the second result display unit 306b will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second special figure corresponding process is executed once after the execution of the first special figure corresponding process in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the second special figure variation start process is performed in the second special figure corresponding process. This is executed when the second result display unit 306b specifies that the display of the variation of the specific symbol is to be started. Specifically, the second special figure variation start process is not in each open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 306b is not displaying the variation of the specific symbol, and the first result display unit 306a displays the outlier result. This is executed when there is no medium and the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb (RbN> 0).

  First, in step S1801, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the second reserved number storage area RbN is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1802, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the second reserved area Rb for variable display is executed. Since the data setting process is the same as the data setting process of the first special figure variation start process (FIG. 33), the description is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the second execution area AE2 matches a predetermined outlier.

  In subsequent step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination in step S1803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S1805 to S1807, processing for determining the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b is executed.

  Here, the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b is set to be different depending on the mode of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, the variation display time set when the first result display unit 306a is displaying the out-of-range variation is set to be shorter than that when it is not.

  Specifically, first, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is displaying a deviation variation. If the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviation variation, the process proceeds to step S1806 to execute a normal variation display time determination process. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by referring to the normal table TD11 stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS is grasped.

  The normal table TD11 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The normal table TD11 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is associated with the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b. In the normal table TD11, the fluctuation display time is sufficiently longer than the winning fluctuation display time (0.5 sec) of the first result display section 306a and the minimum deviation fluctuation display time (30 sec) of the first result display section 306a. ) Is set to multiple times. Specifically, 3.0, 5.0, and 7.0 sec are set in the normal table TD11. In step S1806, by referring to the normal table TD11, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS among the fluctuation display times is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is stored in the RAM 204. Are set for the second variable display time counter Ty provided in the various counter areas 235.

  The second variation display time counter Ty is updated so that 1 is subtracted when the second result display unit 306b is performing variation display in the second special figure corresponding processing. Since the second special figure corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14) as described above, the second variable display time counter Ty is displayed as a variable in the second result display unit 306b. Is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec, which is the execution cycle of normal processing. The MPU 202 grasps that the variable display time has elapsed based on the second variable display time counter Ty becoming “0”, and executes a process of terminating the variable display in the second result display unit 306b.

  On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is displaying a deviation variation, the process proceeds to step S1807 to execute a time variation variation display time determination process. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by referring to the time reduction table TD12 stored in the change display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the change display time corresponding to the acquired change type counter CS is grasped.

  The time reduction table TD12 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The time reduction table TD12 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is associated with the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b. In the time reduction table TD12, a plurality of times shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11 are set. Specifically, 0.7, 1.0, and 1.3 sec are set in the time reduction table TD12. In step S1807, by referring to the time reduction table TD12, the time corresponding to the obtained variation type counter CS among the above variation display times is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped variation display time is set to the second variation. Set for display time counter Ty.

  Here, since the variation display time set in the time reduction table TD12 is set shorter than the variation display time set in the normal table TD11, the first result display unit 306a is currently displaying the variation variation. In some cases, the second result display unit 306b performs a variable display that is shorter than the normal case.

  As for the variable display time, if the minimum variable display time that can be selected in the normal variable display time determination process is set longer than the maximum variable display time that can be selected in the short-time variable display time determination process, its specific The number of types of the variable time and the variable display time is arbitrary.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the average variation display time selected during the outlier variation display of the first result display unit 306a is set shorter than the average variation display time when it is not.

  If it is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, a deviation variation display time determination process is executed. The outlier variation display time determination process is the same as the normal variation display time determination process, but is not limited thereto, and for example, a different variation display time may be set.

  After the execution of the process of step S1806, step S1807, or step S1808, the second result display unit 306b starts the variation display of the specific symbol in step S1809, and the second special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Incidentally, in the jackpot result based on the winning to the lower operating port 304, the jackpot type is not provided. For this reason, the structure which concerns on distribution determination is abbreviate | omitted.

<About the flow of the game and the effects of each of the above variation start processing>
Next, the flow of the game of this embodiment and the effect | action by said each variation start process are demonstrated.

  First, on the basis of winning in the upper working port 303 or the lower working port 304, a big hit lottery is performed, and the specific symbol corresponding to the big hit lottery result in the first result display unit 306a or the second result display unit 306b is changed. Display starts. The jackpot lottery is almost won. When the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is performed at the end timing of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a, the variation display and the jackpot lottery result related thereto are reset (erased). The Then, the first opening / closing execution mode is started based on the end of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a, and the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is not started until the first opening / closing execution mode ends. Thereafter, when the first opening / closing execution mode ends, the variable display of the second result display unit 306b is newly started on the condition that there is holding information in the second holding area Rb.

  Here, the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is set shorter than the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b. For this reason, the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a is likely to end before the end timing of the variation display of the second result display unit 306b. Therefore, in a situation where the winning fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, the winning fluctuation display is ended without being reset in the second result display section 306b, and an event of shifting to the second opening / closing execution mode is unlikely to occur. .

  In particular, as compared with the first embodiment, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b selected when the outlier variation display of the first result display unit 306a is not being displayed is the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. It is set sufficiently larger than time. As a result, in a situation where the outlier fluctuation display of the first result display section 306a is not performed, the fluctuation of the second result display section 306b is performed regardless of the randomness of the winning timings to the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 304. During the display, the winning display of the first result display unit 306a is easily finished.

  On the other hand, when the outlier fluctuation display is performed in the first result display section 306a, the outlier fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a is set longer than the fluctuation display time of the second result display section 306b. During the deviation fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the second result display unit 306b is likely to end. Then, when the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b is finished, the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, and the counting of the variation display time of the outlier variation display on the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped. During the second opening / closing execution mode, a round game (opening / closing operation of the second big prize opening 302a) is performed, and the game ball wins the second big prize opening 302a. Thereby, a privilege is provided with respect to a player.

  Then, at the end timing of the round game, when the outlier variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, the variation display based on the new hold information can be performed after the second opening / closing execution mode is terminated. . In this case, when the variation display is the winning variation display, the second opening / closing execution mode is started again based on the end of the winning variation display. As a result, the second opening / closing execution mode can be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is out of display. In other words, the state in which the first result display unit 306a is performing the deviation fluctuation display is a state in which the second opening / closing execution mode is easily performed, and can be said to be an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The advantageous state includes at least the time during which the variation display is performed in the second result display unit 306b until the count of the outlier variation display time of the first result display unit 306a reaches “0”, 2 The time until the time when the hold information is not present in the hold area Rb is combined with the time when the change display time is reached.

  Here, in the situation where the winning timing to the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 is random, the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is reset due to the end of the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. In order to facilitate this, it is preferable to set the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b as long as possible than the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a. However, if the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b is lengthened, the interval at which the first result display unit 306a is shifted to the second opening / closing execution mode in the situation where the outlier variation display is performed, that is, one second opening / closing execution is performed. Since the interval between the mode and the next second opening / closing execution mode is increased, the smooth progress of the game is hindered, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation variation, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b is set shorter than the normally selected variation display time. The Thereby, since the interval between each second opening / closing execution mode is shortened, the game can be smoothly advanced in the advantageous state.

<Production control processing and opening / closing execution command response processing>
Next, the effect control process in this embodiment will be described.

  In the effect control process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution command has been received instead of the process of step S1303 of the effect control process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. The opening / closing execution command is a command that is set when shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game state transition process is executed between the first special figure corresponding process and the second special figure corresponding process in the normal process. In the first game state transition process, a process for shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the completion of the winning variation display in the first result display unit 306a, and a process related to the round game, specifically The processing related to the opening / closing control of the first big winning opening 301a is executed. The opening / closing execution command is set in the process of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the first gaming state transition process. The opening / closing execution command is set with information for identifying the type of jackpot result that triggered the current first opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, instead of the process of step S1304, an opening / closing execution command response process is executed. The opening / closing execution command response processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing from step S1901 to step S1905 is the same as the processing from step S1502 to step S1506 of the release command response processing (FIG. 27), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, different types of holding notice effects are set in correspondence with the fact that two jackpot results having different numbers of rounds, which are the number of round games performed in the first opening / closing execution mode, are set. ing.

  Specifically, in step S1906, the number of rounds in the current first opening / closing execution mode is grasped. Specifically, the type of jackpot result that triggered the current first opening / closing execution mode is grasped based on the information included in the opening / closing execution command received this time. Then, the number of rounds corresponding to the type is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S1907, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds grasped in the step S1906 is a multi-round (3 rounds). If it is not multiple rounds, the process advances to step S1908 to start a hold notice effect corresponding to the success / failure information grasped in step S1905, and the present opening / closing execution command response process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there are multiple rounds, the process proceeds to step S1909, a reach hold notice effect corresponding to the success / failure information grasped in step S1905 is started, and the open / close execution command response process is terminated. In the reach hold notice effect, after the reach display is performed as the decorative symbol variation display mode, the stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the success / failure information is performed.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a stage in which the stop result is derived and displayed after the decorative symbol variation display on the symbol display device 81 is started, and is a variation display state that is likely to become an advantageous state. The display state to make you think.

  In other words, there is a possibility that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols is established by stopping the decorative symbols for some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81. This is a display state in which a certain combination of reach decorative symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the display of the decorative symbols, reach decoration in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 81. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of symbols, and a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 8 will be described in detail. First, in the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the decorative symbol variation display is finished in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 in a state where the reach lines are formed. Reach display. When an advantageous state occurs, specifically, when the fluctuation display related to the reach display is out of the fluctuation display, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is the reach line. The decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated in such a manner that it is stopped and displayed above.

  In the reach display, the combination of reach decorative symbols is displayed as described above, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Includes those that perform reach production, and those that display reach by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen G after reducing or hiding the combination of reach decorative symbols It is.

  According to this configuration, when the hold information relating to the next game round is acquired at the timing when the first opening / closing execution mode is started, the hold notice effect is executed for the hold information relating to the next game round. Is done. In this case, either the normal hold notice effect or the reach hold notice effect is selected as the hold notice effect according to the mode of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the case of a multi-round result with a large number of rounds, the time required to digest the first opening / closing execution mode is longer than in the case of a small round result. For this reason, it is possible to ensure a long time for performing the hold notice effect, and it is possible to suitably perform reach display. Therefore, diversification of the hold notice effect can be achieved, and the degree of attention of the hold notice effect can be increased.

  In the pending command handling process of the present embodiment, a process for grasping the remaining opening / closing execution mode time is executed instead of the remaining opening time. Specifically, when setting the hold command, the MPU 202 of the main control device 101 sets the current round information and remaining open time information (specifically, numerical information of the timer counter). When a hold command is received, these pieces of information are stored, and the remaining opening / closing execution mode time is grasped based on the information.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  An upper operation port 303 and a lower operation port 304 are provided, and the first result display unit 306a and the second result display unit 306b perform variable display independently based on winning in each operation port 303, 304. Then, when the winning variation display of the first result display unit 306a is finished, the variation display of the second result display unit 306b is reset. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game in which relevance is given to the determination result of the success / failure determination based on the winning of each operation port 303, 304.

  When the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b is finished, the variation display time count in the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped, and then the second opening / closing execution mode related to the winning variation display is performed. The count is restarted based on the completion. This avoids simultaneous occurrence of the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode while using the determination result regarding the variation display that is subject to suspension and the variation display time until suspension. be able to.

  When a game ball is launched aiming at the lower operation port 304, a prize for the upper operation port 303 can be generated. As a result, it is possible to preferentially generate a prize for the lower operation port 304 and to suppress an action that makes the game advantageous. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  That is, in order to prevent the winning variation display from being performed in the first result display unit 306a and the winning variation display to be performed in the second result display unit 306b, winning in the upper working port 303 is avoided. However, it is conceivable to win a prize for the lower working port 304. Specifically, it is conceivable that the game ball is fired so that the winning at the lower operating port 304 is preferentially generated over the winning at the upper operating port 303. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative positional relationship between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 is set so that only the lower operating port 304 cannot be aimed, and both the operating ports 303 and 304 are set. The structure which guides a game ball toward is provided. Thereby, it can suppress that a difference arises in the privilege obtained according to a player's skill, and the fairness of a game is secured.

  The variation display time of the second result display unit 306b in the situation where the outlier variation display is performed in the first result display unit 306a, and that in the situation where the outlier variation display is not performed in the first result display unit 306a. Also set short. Thereby, in the situation where the first variation display mode is not displayed on the first result display unit 306a, the first variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a while suppressing the occurrence frequency of the second opening / closing execution mode. In the situation, the interval between the second opening / closing execution modes can be shortened. Therefore, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

  In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening 301a and the second big prize opening 302a are provided separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single big prize opening may be used. In this case, in the first opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to set the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening so that the winning of the big winning opening does not occur or the winning frequency is lower than in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, for example, an accessory that can be moved between a position that restricts the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning opening and a position that is not restricted is provided, and the accessory is changed based on the first opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure arrange | positioned in the position which does not restrict | regulate the said accessory based on being arrange | positioned in the said restricting position and becoming 2nd opening / closing execution mode. In short, it may be configured such that winning in the big winning opening is restricted in the situation in the first opening / closing execution mode, and winning in the big winning opening is allowed in the situation in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it was set as the structure which adjusts the time which is in the 1st opening / closing execution mode by changing the number of rounds, but it is not restricted to this, For example, the upper limit opening time of the 1st big winning opening 301a is set. It is good also as a structure which adjusts the time which is in the 1st opening / closing execution mode by making it differ. However, when the upper limit opening time of the first big winning opening 301a per round game is set to a specific time (for example, 30 sec), the time in the first opening / closing execution mode is within the range of the specific time. It becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by executing a plurality of round games, it is possible to secure a time longer than the specific time as the time in the first opening / closing execution mode, Diversification can be achieved.

  Also, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 303 may be different from the winning probability of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 304. In this case, by adjusting both, the frequency at which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed and the frequency at which the second opening / closing execution mode is performed can be adjusted, and the game can be managed appropriately.

  Further, the winning probability of the big win lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 304 in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviation variation is more than the winning probability in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaying the variation variation. May be lowered. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd opening-and-closing execution mode is performed in the situation where the 1st result display part 306a is outside and the fluctuation display is not being displayed, and grant of the unintended privilege can be controlled.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the lower working port 304 is different from that of the second embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  The game board 400 in this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 400.

  In the game area of the game board 400 of the present embodiment, an upper operation port 401 and a lower operation port 402 are provided, and a through gate 403 is provided. Corresponding to the through gate 403, the decorative member 65 is provided with an accessory display portion 404, and the lower working port 402 is provided with an electric accessory 402 a.

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 403, a support lottery is performed, and a normal symbol variation display is performed on the accessory display unit 404. When the lottery result of the support lottery is a winning result, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the accessory display unit 404, and then support (opening / closing operation) of the electric accessory 402a is performed.

  In the situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 304 is impossible, while in the situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 304 is allowed. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the electric accessory 402a is in a closed state, the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper working port 303 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The relative positional relationship between the operation ports 401 and 402 is set. When the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, the electric accessory 402a is set such that the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper working port 303 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. The movable range is set. Thereby, when the electric accessory 402a is changed from the closed state to the open state, the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 304 is allowed.

  According to such a configuration, the winning frequency for the lower operation port 304 varies depending on whether or not the support of the electric accessory 402a is generated in a situation where the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a is performed. Since the winning frequency affects the number of executions of the second opening / closing execution mode, it affects the player's privilege. For this reason, in the second opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the through gate 403, the electric accessory 402a, and the accessory display unit 404.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 304 is accept | permitted in the condition where the electric accessory 402a is a closed state. In short, it is only necessary that the winning frequency for the lower operation port 304 when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state is configured to be higher than that when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state.

  In addition, the center frame 305a of the variable display unit 305 is provided with a third holding lamp portion 405 indicating a winning history to the through gate 403. The number of game balls won in the through gate 403 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed when the third holding lamp section 405 is turned on.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, an electric power counter C21 is provided as a counter for performing support lottery based on winning through the through gate 403, and an electric power counter C21 for storing the electric power counter C21 is stored. A role holding area 411 is provided. Since the electric utility counter C21 and the electric utility reservation area 411 have the same configuration as the first electric combination counter C1 and the first electric combination reservation area 231 of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the electric accessory 402a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 402a of the lower working port 402 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery using the electronic role counter C21 is different. Specifically, the winning probability of the support lottery in the low frequency support mode is smaller than that in the high frequency support mode.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 402a is opened when the support win is set is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the support lottery result becomes the winning result and the open state of the electric accessory 402a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode, the support interval from when the predetermined support is performed to when the next support is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the normal symbol variation display time performed in the accessory display unit 404 is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

  From the above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 402 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. And when winning to the lower operation port 402 occurs, it can shift to the second opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, a privilege is easily given to the player.

<Telephone support processing>
The electronic combination support processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal processing (FIG. 14), the electric power support processing is independent of the processing related to the specific symbol variation display in the both result display units 306a and 306b based on the winning of the game balls in both the operation ports 401 and 402. Executed. In the power combination support process, the normal symbol change display on the accessory display unit 404 and the opening / closing operation control of the electric accessory 402a are performed.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 402a is being supported. If the electric accessory 402a is not being supported, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed on the accessory display unit 404.

  If the normal symbol is not variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not there is holding information (electric role counter C21) that is not yet a lottery for support lottery in the electric role holding area 411.

  If there is no hold information that is not yet a lottery for support lottery, the main power support process is terminated as it is. If there is the hold information, the process proceeds to step S2004, and the first result display is displayed. It is determined whether or not the part 306a is out of display.

  If the first result display unit 306a is not out of change display, the process advances to step S2005 to execute a normal symbol change start process corresponding to the low frequency support mode, and the main role support process ends. Specifically, the support lottery is performed using the hold information, and the process for determining the variable symbol display time is executed. Then, the normal symbol variation display is started.

  On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is displaying the out-of-fluctuation change, the process proceeds to step S2006, where the normal symbol change start process corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed, and the main role support process ends. To do. Specifically, the support lottery is performed so that the winning probability is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and the variable display time shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode is determined. Then, the normal symbol variation display is started. Thereby, in the high frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened.

  If the normal symbol variation display is in progress (step S2002: YES), the mid-variation processing is executed in step S2007. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed, a process of displaying a stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is executed. When the support lottery result is the winning result, a flag for specifying that the support is being supported is set.

  If it is being supported, an affirmative decision is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is displaying a deviation variation.

  If the first result display unit 306a is not out of change display, in step S2009, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and the main role support process is terminated. Specifically, a process for opening the electric accessory 402a only once for 0.2 sec is executed.

  On the other hand, when the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviation fluctuation, in step S2010, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed to perform the main function support process. finish. Specifically, the operation of opening the electric accessory 402a for a time longer than the opening time in the low frequency support mode (for example, 0.4 sec) is set as a unit operation, and a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.2 sec) is passed. Then, a process for performing the unit operation a plurality of times (for example, three times) is executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the situation where the deviation fluctuation display is performed on the first result display section 306a, the high frequency support mode is set, and the deviation fluctuation display is displayed on the first result display section 306a. Low-frequency support mode in situations where no change display is performed, specifically, in a situation where fluctuation display is not performed in the first result display section 306a and in a situation where winning variation display is performed in the first result display section 306a It was set. As a result, it is difficult for a winning to the lower operation port 304 to occur in a situation in which the first result display unit 306a is not performing a deviation variation display, and thus the second opening / closing execution mode is less likely to be executed in that situation. On the other hand, since the winning to the lower working port 304 is likely to occur in the situation where the first result display unit 306a is performing the deviation fluctuation display, the execution frequency of the second opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set higher than that in the low-frequency support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the winning probability of the support lottery is set to be the same Good. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of normal symbol variation display times are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short variation display time is easily selected or the average variation display time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. In short, the winning probability of the support lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 402a so that the high frequency support mode has a higher winning frequency to the lower operation port 402 than the low frequency support mode. What is necessary is just to make it at least 1 conditions differ among aspects.

  In the present embodiment, the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b may be set shorter than the winning variation display time of the first result display unit 306a. Even in this case, when the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviation fluctuation, the winning combination of the game ball to the lower operation port 402 is regulated by the electric accessory 402a, and therefore the second opening / closing execution mode is set. Is unlikely to occur.

  Further, for example, the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 401 and the support of the electric accessory 402a may be synchronized. Specifically, when a winning for the upper working port 401 occurs in the situation where the normal symbol winning variation display is being performed on the accessory display unit 404, the normal symbol winning variation display is immediately performed based on the winning. It is set as the structure which is complete | finished and starts the support of the electrically-driven accessory 402a. Thereby, after the winning to the upper working port 401 occurs, the frequency of the winning to the lower working port 402 is likely to increase.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of another embodiment described below may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the first embodiment, after the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit region 71, the deviation result is displayed for a predetermined time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first fluctuation is displayed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display. When the hold information is stored in the 1 electronic combination hold area 231, the next variable display based on the hold information may be immediately started. In this case, even if the next fluctuation display is the winning fluctuation display, the winning fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 may be ended during the winning fluctuation display. That is, it can be said that it is in an advantageous state even during the next fluctuation display after the deviation fluctuation display. If the next fluctuation display is the winning fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is ended based on the end of the winning fluctuation display, and the advantageous state is ended. To do.

  According to the above configuration, the deviation variation display (outage game times) and the next variation display (next game times) are digested as a series of advantageous states. For example, when the outliers are displayed continuously, each of these outliers and the winning variation after the outliers are displayed as a series of advantageous states. As a result, the fluctuation display before and after can be closely related, and the game can be smoothly progressed because it is not necessary to secure the display time of the detachment result.

  In this case, in the display of the remaining advantageous time, for example, the remaining time of the deviation fluctuation display is displayed based on starting the deviation fluctuation display. Then, the deviation fluctuation display time is counted, and when the count ends (when the remaining time becomes “0”), it is determined whether or not the pending command information exists. When the pending command information does not exist, the ending is executed, while when the pending command information exists, it waits for the variable command to be received. Based on the receipt of the variable command, the remaining advantageous time is reset and the count is restarted. The remaining advantageous time is set to 0.5 sec when a winning variation command is received, and is set to a deviation variation display time when a variation variation command is received. As a result, it can appear that the remaining advantageous time is extended, so that the degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

  In the above configuration, the ending of 2 seconds is executed after the winning game times after the off game times. If the hold command information is set in the hold command information storage area 261, a short time hold notice effect is set for the hold command information after the ending. Thereby, during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning variation display that triggered the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to perform the hold notice effect related to the ending and the next game round.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (2) In the first embodiment, the variation type counter CS at that time is not acquired based on the winning to the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation type counter CS in FIG. In this case, the variation type counter CS is configured to be stored in the first electric utility reservation area 231 together with the first electric utility counter C1, and the first electric utility counter C1 acquired this time is removed in the confirmation process for holding advance notice. If the value corresponds to a value, the deviation variation display time may be determined using the obtained variation type counter CS. In this case, an off hold command including the off fluctuation display time is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102. Thereby, in the sound emission control device 102, based on the receipt of the hold command, the first electronic combination counter C1 corresponding to the outage is acquired, and the outflow fluctuation display time (based on the first electronic combination counter C1) It is possible to grasp the game play time).

  In such a configuration, for example, when the first electric combination counter C1 that is the same as the outlier is continuously acquired, both may be handled as one game round in a pseudo manner. Specifically, for example, hold information (first electric power counter C1) related to the next game round is acquired at a timing before the timing at which a predetermined off game round is started, and the hold information is In the case where it is the same as the outlier, the next outlier game is started immediately after completion of the predetermined outgame time.

  In this case, the sound emission control device 102 determines whether or not the next game turn is a game turn off in the process related to the start of the advantageous state effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold command information related to the next game round is acquired and the hold command information corresponds to the detachment. If it is confirmed that the next game time is an out-of-game time, the out-of-game time of the next out-game time is grasped, and the out-of-game time and the next out-of-game time of the current out-of-game time are determined. The total time including the off game play time is displayed on the display screen G, and the countdown is started. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if one game game with a long advantageous time is being performed.

  Furthermore, when the first electronic combination counter C1 that is related to the next game turn and has the same value as the outlier in the situation where a predetermined off game turn is being performed, After the end of the off game time, the next off game time is started immediately. Then, in the light emission control device 102, in the hold command response process, it is determined whether the hold command received this time is related to the next game time and the next game time is an off game time. It is determined whether or not an effect during the advantageous state is being executed. If the above two determinations are affirmed, the countdown is performed by adding the out-of-game time corresponding to the currently held command to the current remaining advantageous time. Thereby, it can be shown that the advantageous time has increased in the middle, and the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state can be increased.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the two second through gates 52 and the third through gate 53 are provided, and the second electric combination winning port 42 and the second electric combination item 42a are associated with these, and the third electric combination is provided. Although the winning prize opening 43 and the third electric winning combination 43a are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which one through gate, an electric winning prize opening, and an electric winning combination are provided may be employed. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of attention to the flow-down mode of game balls, a configuration in which two are provided is preferable.

  For example, it is good also as a structure which matches several electric winning a prize port with respect to one through gate. In this case, when the support lottery result based on the winning of one through gate is the winning result, one of the plurality of electronic winning winning ports is selected by internal lottery, and the selected electronic winning combination It is good also as a structure which opens and closes the electric accessory provided in the winning opening.

  In this case, since it is impossible to visually determine which opening / closing operation of the electric combination is performed before the opening / closing operation of the electric combination is performed, attention can be paid to the operation mode of the electric combination. . As a result, the degree of attention to the notification by the electric accessory can be further increased.

  (4) In the first embodiment, each of the electric winning award ports 41 to 43 is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one electric winning award port and an electric accessory may be provided. In this case, based on the support lottery triggered by winning the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 rather than the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory based on the support lottery triggered by winning the first through gate 51. The opening / closing operation mode of the electric accessory may be set so that the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory has a higher expectation for the game ball to enter. Thereby, the number of game balls paid out to the player in the advantageous state can be increased.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the minimum variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is set longer than the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The minimum variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be set to be the same as the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71. Even in this case, the first normal map change start process is executed before the second normal map change start process and the third general map change start process in the same processing time of the normal process, and the first unit region 71 Since the process related to the end of the variable display is executed prior to the process related to the end of the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, the variable display of the normal symbol in the first unit area 71 ends first. Will be.

  Furthermore, the distance between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53 is not limited to the configuration in which the processing order is set as described above so that the distance that the game ball falls is 4 msec or more. It is good also as a structure to set.

  (6) In the first embodiment, the support lottery result based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is an advantageous result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first through gate 51 When the support lottery result based on winning a prize is a winning result, the player may be in an advantageous state. For example, the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set longer than the variation display times of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, and the outlier variation display time of the first unit region 71 is set to the second unit region 72. And set to be shorter than the variable display time of the third unit region 73. Then, based on the end of the winning variation display or the outlier variation display in the first unit region 71, the variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is reset. In this case, the winning change display in the first unit area 71 (during winning game rotation) is advantageous for the player.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (7) In the first embodiment, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started while the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 is started, the deviation fluctuation of the first unit area 71 is started. Although the display time count is temporarily stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the display time is not temporarily stopped may be employed. In this case, since the advantageous time can be handled as a fixed time, the management of the game can be facilitated and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the variable display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 is reset based on the end of the winning game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is not reset. Also good. In this case, if the support mode (opening / closing operation mode) of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a during the winning game is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than that during the off-game Good. Thus, even if the support of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is started during the winning game due to not being reset, the privilege given to the player is given. It can be reduced and an advantageous state can be secured.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (9) In the first embodiment, another variation display may be reset based on the end of one winning variation display among the variation displays of the unit areas 71 to 73. In this case, a lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is separately performed, and when the advantageous state is shifted to, the variable display time of the first unit region 71 is set to the second unit region 72 and the plurality of predetermined game times. It may be configured to set longer than the variable display time of the third unit region 73. Thereby, it will be in an advantageous state for a player until multiple game times are digested.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notice effect and the short time hold notice effect are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the hold notice effect may be executed. However, if attention is paid to increasing the execution frequency of the effects, a configuration that executes both the hold notice effect and the short time hold notice effect is preferable.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the normal hold notice effect (and the short time normal hold notice effect) is performed across the opening or first opening / closing execution mode of the first electric accessory 41a and the next game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be performed only during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a or the first opening / closing execution mode. In this case, since the difference in effect time between the normal hold notice effect and the advantageous hold notice effect is unlikely to occur, the result of the next game round is specified at a timing before the stop result is displayed on the display screen G. Inconvenience can be avoided.

  In view of the diversification of the normal holding notice effect, the configuration that is executed during the next game round is preferable.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous reservation notice effect is performed only during the opening of the first electric accessory 41a or the first opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure performed ranging over open | release or 1st opening-and-closing execution mode, and subsequent detachment game times. In this case, it is ensured as the effect time of the advantageous hold notice effect for the winning variation display time after the off game time is started. And it is good to set it as the structure which performs an effect in advantageous state based on completion | finish of an advantageous reservation notice effect.

  (13) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration in which an effect relating to a game time (holding notice effect) is performed using the time of support of the first electric accessory 41a on the front side and the time when the game time is performed with respect to the game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect related to the game times may be executed using the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the rear side with respect to the game times. That is, it is good also as a structure which performs the effect which concerns on a winning game time across the winning game time and the support of the 1st electrically-powered article 41a based on the said winning game time. In this case, the stop result of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a are indicated to the player so that the result of the current game round is not grasped at a timing before the end timing of the above-mentioned effect. It should be hard to understand.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the time between the winning game time and the next game time (the support time of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, the first opening and closing execution in the second and third embodiments) The mode time) is a fixed time, but is not limited to this, and may be set as a variable time. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, it may be configured to allow winning to the first electric winning prize winning opening 41. Accordingly, the support time varies depending on the winning mode for the first electric winning prize port 41.

  In such a configuration, it is preferable to change the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect according to the time between the winning game time and the next game time. Specifically, in the normal hold notice effect and the short-time normal hold notice effect, it is preferable to temporarily display a combination of off-decorated symbols based on the start of the next game.

  In the advantageous reservation notice effect and the short-time advantageous reservation notice effect, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed based on the start of the next game.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display screen G. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured not to be displayed. In this case, the player will digest the game in the advantageous state while predicting when the advantageous state will end.

  (16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the advantageous time (displacement display time of the first unit region 71) is changed. Thereby, the management of the game can be facilitated and the processing configuration can be simplified. However, if it pays attention to the point which raises the attention degree to a game, the structure to which it fluctuates is more excellent.

  (17) In the first embodiment, the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a are set to have the same opening / closing mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 42a You may set so that an opening / closing aspect may differ with the electrically-driven accessory 43a. In this case, the opening / closing mode of both may be set so that the degree of expectation that the game ball will enter is different. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes. Can be improved.

  Further, the winning probability of the support lottery may be different depending on the winning probability of the support lottery based on the winning to the second through gate 52 and the winning probability of the support lottery based on the winning to the third through gate 53. Even in this case, depending on whether the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53, there is a difference in the benefits given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the flow-down mode of game balls.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, when the outlier variation display of the first unit region 71 or the first result display unit 306a is finished, the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, or the second result display unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be reset. In this case, since the variation range of the advantageous time can be reduced, it is possible to easily manage the game and simplify the processing related to the end of the advantageous state.

  (19) In the first embodiment, “0” is displayed as a count display of the remaining advantageous time based on the end of the deviation fluctuation display of the first unit region 71. For example, the count display of the remaining advantageous time may be continued until the advantageous state ends. Specifically, whether or not the winning variation is being displayed in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 at the end timing of the deviation variation display (for example, after execution of the display of the deviation result in the first unit region 71). Determine whether or not. When the winning variation display is being performed, the remaining variation display time is grasped based on the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3. Note that when both of them are in the winning variation display, the longer remaining variation display time is grasped. Then, a command including the remaining fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the sound emission control device 102. The display control device 212 displays the remaining fluctuation display time based on the reception of the command.

  Furthermore, the end condition of the opening / closing operation may be displayed based on the fact that the remaining fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, 6 sec is displayed as the upper limit opening time, and 10 is displayed as the upper limit number. Then, the upper limit opening time and the upper limit number are counted. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the timing when the advantageous state ends.

  (20) According to the first embodiment, both the variable display of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a are in a situation where the hold information is not acquired in the first electric charge holding area 231. When the first electric power counter C1 is acquired in a situation where no change is made, the deviation fluctuation display is immediately performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined period between the acquisition timing and the start timing of the deviation fluctuation display is not limited. It is good also as a structure which provides time and performs an opening effect in the said predetermined time.

  (21) In the first embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate support for the first electric accessory 41a based on winning in the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to emit a specific lamp provided in the game area. That is, the lottery target based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is arbitrary.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide the 1st electrically-driven accessory 41a. In this case, when the lottery result based on the winning to the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the winning result is displayed for a predetermined time. Further, while the winning result is displayed, the second unit area 72 and The change display of the third unit area 73 is prevented from being started. Thereby, the game similar to 1st Embodiment can be performed.

  (22) In the first embodiment, the event that a game ball wins the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 does not easily occur without going through the first through gate 51. For example, the above-described event may easily occur. In this case, the positional relationship of the through gates 51 to 53 and the position of the nail for guiding the game ball are set so that the winning frequency to the through gates 51 to 53 does not change regardless of the manner of launching the game balls. Good. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming to win the winning through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in preference to the winning through the first through gate 51, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game. can do.

  (23) In the first embodiment, based on the start of support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a, the change display time is counted in both the winning change display and the outlier change display in the first unit area 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to pause only in the case of an out-of-fluctuation display, and may not be temporarily stopped in the case of a winning variation display. In this case, it is preferable that the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a is ended based on the end of the winning variation display (start of support of the first electric combination 41a).

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the high probability mode and the low probability mode in which the winning probability of the support lottery using the first electric power counter C1 or the success / failure determination using the jackpot random number counter C11 is relatively high are set. It is good also as composition to do. In this case, it can be said that the low probability mode is more advantageous for the player because it is easier for the first unit region 71 or the first result display unit 306a to perform the deviation variation display.

  (25) In the first embodiment, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a may be varied. In this case, when the first electric accessory 41a is opened for a long time, the reach display described in the second embodiment may be performed.

  Moreover, the opening / closing operation | movement aspect of the 1st electrically-powered article 41a is good also as a structure which makes it the structure which is opened twice on both sides of the interval time when the 1st electrically-driven object 41a becomes a closed state, and changes an interval time. As a result, it is possible to secure a time longer than the upper limit opening time as the presentation time of the hold notice effect.

  (26) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous time is displayed in a countdown format. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a countup format. In this case, it is preferable to grasp the remaining advantageous time by separately displaying the current deviation fluctuation display time.

  (27) In the first embodiment, based on the end of the winning variation display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of other unit regions is suspended, The count is restarted based on the end of the support based on the winning variation display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured not to restart. In this case, for example, the configuration may be such that the variable display time is reset based on the end of the support, or the support related to the variable display that is temporarily suspended after the end of the support may be started. However, when paying attention to the diversity of games, a configuration in which the game is paused is preferable.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the processing related to the setting of the hold command (first specifying process) is immediately executed based on the acquisition of the hold information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the first electric accessory 41a The processing related to the setting of the hold command may be executed based on the start of the support or the first opening / closing execution mode. Even in this case, the hold notice effect can be executed. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the short-time hold notice effect can be executed, it is better to perform the arrangement immediately based on the acquisition of the hold information.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, each time hold information is acquired, a hold command based on the hold information is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 102, and the voice light emission control device 102 is configured to store each time. For example, only a hold command based on hold information related to the next game round may be transmitted. Even in this case, various holding notice effects can be executed, and the storage capacity of the RAM 244 can be reduced. However, in view of the complexity of the processing, it is better to store each time.

  (30) In the first embodiment, during the advantageous state, when one of the supports of the second electric combination 42a and the third electric combination 43a is performed, the other is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which both are supported may be employed. Thereby, the privilege given with respect to a player can be increased.

  As a specific configuration, for example, in the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73, the other variation display is not temporarily stopped based on the end of the winning variation display of one unit region.

  (31) In the first embodiment, the support lottery is performed based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any configuration in which operation (specific control) is performed may be used. For example, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52, for example, a game ball may be paid out as a bonus of the same type.

  (32) In the first embodiment, based on the end of the winning variation display of the first unit region 71, the variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 and the trigger of the variation display are triggered. Although it was set as the structure which resets a support lottery result, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which resets only a support lottery result. In this case, the variable display is terminated without displaying the stop result after the variable display time has elapsed.

  In addition, based on the end of the winning variation display in the first unit area 71, a part or all of the hold information stored in the second electric role holding area 232 and the third electric role holding area 233 is deleted. It is good also as a structure.

  (33) In the first embodiment, the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71 is a predetermined fixed time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be varied. In this case, the longest time of the winning variation display time may be set shorter than the shortest variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Thereby, the game nature demonstrated in each said embodiment is realizable.

  Further, for example, the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 (the average time when the winning variation display time varies) is calculated from the average time of the variation display times of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Alternatively, the configuration may be set to be short.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the deviation variation display time of the first unit region 71 is varied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to a predetermined fixed time. In this case, the fixed time may be set so that the variable display in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 can be performed a plurality of times. However, if attention is paid to the advantageous time and the variety of games, a configuration in which the deviation fluctuation display time is changed is preferable.

  Furthermore, the variable display times of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be set to a predetermined fixed time instead of the variable configuration. In this case, each variation display time may be set so that the fixed time is longer than the winning variation display time of the first unit region 71 and shorter than the outlier variation display time of the first unit region 71.

  In short, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display is likely to end earlier than the variation display of the other unit areas 72 and 73, while the first unit area 71 If the variation display time is set, the variation display time is set so that the variation display can be performed a plurality of times in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 during the variation variation display. Good.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (34) In each of the above-described embodiments, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric component 42a is displayed during the display of the fluctuation of the first unit area 71 (in the second embodiment, the display of the fluctuation of the first result display unit 306a). Although the support of the electric accessory 43a (the second opening / closing execution mode in the second embodiment) is configured to be performed a plurality of times, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be completed once. In this case, the game may be suitably managed by adjusting the expectation degree of the game ball given based on one support or the winning probability of the support lottery (a jackpot lottery in the second embodiment).

  (35) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-mentioned embodiments, such as pachinko machines that generate a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and pachinko machines equipped with other objects The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and sparrow balls.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display unit after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player A part of the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. A part of the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning to the upper working ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) The first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first, the first opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) For executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
Second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third throughgate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operation ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments) The second lottery means (the function for executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing lottery of whether or not to execute the execution mode) Processing function), and
With
In the second specific control, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control, a predetermined period (after the lottery by the second lottery means is performed) This is performed when the winning variation display time of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 in the first embodiment and the winning variation display time of the second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments have elapsed. And
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the invalidating means for invalidating at least one of the lottery result by the second lottery trigger and the second lottery means (variation reset processing of the MPU 202) A gaming machine characterized by having a function to be executed).

  According to the feature A1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. Thereby, a player can be made to confirm the state of the lottery by two lottery means simultaneously.

  In such a configuration, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result by the second lottery means is invalidated. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize the lottery result by the first lottery means while performing the two lottery means independently, and to provide a novel game in which the lottery modes of these lottery means are related. It becomes possible. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature A2. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) starts to display the symbol change. , First display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (function for executing the processing from step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments) A function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202),
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit region 72 in the second and third embodiments). 2 result display section 306b) starts the symbol change display, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (step S904 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) A function of executing the processing of step S1204 to step S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments, and
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the display of the symbol change on one of the display units,
The invalidation unit is configured to display a specific stop result corresponding to execution of the first specific control on the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to invalidate the symbol change display and the lottery result triggered by the change display performed in the second display unit.

  According to the feature A2, the change display of the symbols is independently performed on the first display unit and the second display unit. And when a specific stop result is displayed on the 1st display part or the 2nd display part, the 1st specific control or the 2nd specific control is performed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is performed during the display of the change of the symbol on one display unit can occur, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and improve the interest more suitably. Can be planned.

  In such a configuration, when a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol being performed on the second display unit and the trigger for the change display are provided. The lottery result is invalidated. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second specific control is not executed even though the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, the uncomfortable feeling that can be caused by invalidating the lottery result by the second lottery means can be reduced.

Feature A3. The first display control means is a first period determining means for determining a first change display period that is a period of the change display of the symbol in the first display section (the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and 1709 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the first period determination is performed. The symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the first change display period determined by the means,
The second display control means is a second period determining means for determining a second change display period that is a period of change display of the symbol in the second display section (the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). In the second and third embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1806, 1808, and 1809 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second In the second change display period determined by the period determining means, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode.
The first change display period when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result is set to be shorter than the second change display period,
The first change display period when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is set to be easily longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, characterized by:

  According to the feature A3, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit is finished at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, 1st specific control can be performed preferentially rather than 2nd specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the symbol change display on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the first display unit. Thereby, 2nd specific control can be performed preferentially rather than 1st specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be varied according to the first change display period. Therefore, the symbol change display of the first display unit can be closely associated with the specific control.

Feature A4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first entrance portion (a first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operation ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and a second entrance A sphere (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the first entrance part,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the second entrance part,
The feature A2 is characterized in that when the launch operation is performed aiming at entering the second entrance part, the entrance to the first entrance part can occur. A gaming machine according to Feature A3.

  According to the feature A4, when aiming at the entrance to the second entrance part, the entrance to the first entrance part may naturally occur. Thereby, the act which intentionally generate | occur | produces the entrance to a 2nd entrance part can be suppressed by adjusting the launch aspect of a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control by preferentially performing the symbol change display of the second display unit over the symbol change display of the first display unit. It is possible to suppress a game that is different from the game being played.

Feature A5. The first and second ball entrance portions are a first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which game balls can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passage and the second passage is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passage can pass through the second passage.
The game ball so that the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second passage without passing through the first passage is smaller than the frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage and passes through the second passage. The gaming machine according to feature A4, further comprising a flow mode regulation means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow mode of the game.

  According to the feature A5, the game ball easily passes through the second passage after passing through the first passage. Thereby, after the lottery by the 1st lottery means is performed, the lottery by the 2nd lottery means is easy to be performed. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit tends to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the symbol change display on the first display unit ends during the symbol change display on the second display unit.

Feature A6. The first display control means includes
Period determining means for determining a change display period which is a period of change display of the symbol in the first display unit (function for executing the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third embodiments) The function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and 1709 of the MPU 202 in FIG.
Period measurement means for measuring the change display period determined by the period determination means (a function for executing processing for updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function of updating the first variation display time counter Tx),
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the first display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determining means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, the change display period Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the measurement (the function of executing the temporary stop process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the measurement of the variable display time related to the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the feature A6, when a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, a change display is displayed. Since the measurement of the period is temporarily stopped, the player can execute the second specific control without worrying about the symbol change display on the first display unit. Thereby, it can avoid that a player's attention is distracted during 2nd specific control, and the attention degree to 2nd specific control can be raised.

  In addition, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed, the lottery result by the first lottery means is not invalidated. Thereby, the diversification of the aspect related to the lottery result of the 1st lottery means and the lottery result of the 2nd lottery means can be aimed at, and diversification of a game can be aimed at.

  Feature A7. The change based on the end of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result that triggered the temporary stop in the situation where the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means. Measurement resumption means for resuming measurement of the display period (function for executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, variable display related to the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) The gaming machine according to Feature A6, further comprising a function of resuming time measurement).

  According to the feature A7, the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped when the specific stop result is displayed, and then the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result is terminated, Measurement resumes. Thereby, it is possible to use the symbol change display until the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

  Feature A8. When the non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit The game machine according to Feature A6 or Feature A7, wherein measurement of the change display period is not temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature A8, when a non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the first display unit Therefore, the first specific control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, attention can be paid to the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, the symbol change display based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the symbol change display based on the lottery by the first lottery means can be noted step by step. Accordingly, the two can be closely associated with each other.

Feature A9. The change display period and the period determination unit are a first change display period and a first period determination unit, respectively.
The second display control means is a second period determining means for determining a second change display period which is a period of the change display of the symbol in the second display section (the processing of steps S1006 and 1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). When the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second period is included in the second period. The symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the second change display period determined by the determining means,
Each period determining means includes
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. Decide
Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol on the second display unit during the symbol change display on the first display unit. The game machine according to Feature A7 or Feature A8, wherein each change display period is determined so that the change display can be performed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature A9, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, 1st specific control can be performed preferentially rather than 2nd specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the symbol change display on the second display unit can be performed a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit. Thereby, the state where a series of games based on the lottery by the 2nd lottery means are performed continuously can be created. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

Feature A10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (second electric winning prize port 42 or third electric winning prize port 43 in the first embodiment, second and third embodiments) The second big prize opening 302a)
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
When the second specific control is performed, the variable entry control means for executing the variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (the second electric power in the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). A function of performing a combination opening / closing process and a third electric combination opening / closing process, a function of performing opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
With
The number of game balls that can be entered into the variable entry means during the second specific control is determined in advance,
In the first display unit, each period determination unit changes the change display period when the lottery result by the first lottery unit is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the number of symbol change displays of the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display can be changed.

  According to the feature A10, when the second specific control is performed, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is performed. Thereby, since it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable entry means during the second specific control is determined in advance, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during one second specific control is determined. Thereby, it can suppress that an excessive privilege is provided to a player, and can manage a game easily.

  In such a configuration, since the number of symbol change displays on the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display on the first display unit can be changed, by changing the number of times, The amount of privilege to be granted can be changed. Thereby, the privilege amount provided with respect to a player can be changed, performing management of a game easily.

  Feature A11. In the case where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no change or the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or Feature A10.

  According to the feature A11, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively long second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes long, so that when the second specific control is continuously performed, the game may not be smoothly progressed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively short second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed on the first display unit, the first specific control is executed preferentially over the second specific control, and the inconvenience can be avoided. it can.

Feature A12. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable entry means (lower operating port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the gaming area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the entrance part,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the variable entry means,
On the basis of the fact that the symbol change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is performed in the first display unit. From a low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, a high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable means is relatively high The game according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that the game is provided with means for shifting to the support mode) (a function for executing the processes of steps S2005 and S2009 or steps S2006 and S2010 in the MPU 202). Machine.

  According to the feature A12, the expectation of the entry to the variable entry means is based on the fact that the first display unit displays the change of the pattern corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result. The degree becomes higher. Thereby, since it becomes easy to perform the lottery by the second lottery means, the second specifying control is easily performed in the situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the second specific control in a situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the variable pitch in the open state is used. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation level of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the first display unit indicates the non-winning result. A configuration in which the mode of the variable pitching means is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding thereto is conceivable.

Feature A13. The change display period, the period determining unit, and the period measuring unit are a first change display period, a first period determining unit, and a first period measuring unit, respectively.
The second display control means includes
A second period determining means for determining a second change display period that is a period of the change display of the symbol in the second display unit (function for executing the processing of steps S1006 and 1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
Second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period determined by the second period determining means (a process for updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment is executed). Function)
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the second display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determining means,
Based on a third lottery opportunity (winning to the third through gate 53) different from each lottery opportunity, whether to execute a third specific control (support of the third electric accessory 43a) different from each of the specific controls A third lottery means for performing a lottery of whether or not (function to execute the process of step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, a third display for starting the change display of symbols on a third display unit different from the respective display units and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means Control means (function to execute the processing from step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
The third display control means includes
Third period determining means for determining a third change display period that is a period of change display of the symbol in the third display unit (function for executing the processing of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
Third period measuring means (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 in the first embodiment) for measuring the third change display period determined by the third period determining means;
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the third display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determining means,
The third display control means can start the symbol change display on the third display unit during the symbol change display on the first display unit or the second display unit,
The pause means is
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring unit and Temporarily stopping the measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, wherein measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means is temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature A13, the lottery of the third lottery means and the symbol change display of the third display unit are performed independently of the other lottery and other symbol change displays.

  In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display unit or the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period in the other display units is temporarily stopped. Thereby, as a player, specific control can be performed without minding the change display of the symbol of another display part. Thereby, the attention degree to specific control can be raised.

  Further, according to the relationship with the feature A7, the measurement of the change display period in the other display unit is temporarily stopped by displaying the specific stop result on one of the second display unit and the third display unit. The measurement is resumed based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. Thereby, the space | interval of 1 specific control and the following specific control can be made irregular, and the monotonization of a game can be suppressed.

  Feature A14. A feature of A1 to A13 is characterized in that it comprises a restricting means for restricting the lottery by the second lottery means during the first specific control (a function for making an affirmative decision in step S901 or step S1201 of the MPU 202). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A14, since the lottery by the second lottery unit is restricted during the first specific control, an event in which the first specific control and the second specific control are executed simultaneously can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the complication of the game that may occur due to the provision of the two lottery means and the two specific controls, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  Feature A15. The invalidation means does not invalidate the lottery result of the second lottery means when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14.

  According to feature A15, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery result of the second lottery means is not invalidated, and therefore the second specifying control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result, attention can be paid to the lottery by the second lottery means. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noted step by step. Accordingly, the two can be closely associated with each other.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

  According to the feature A16, it is assumed that the player plays a game in the hope that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. Thereby, unlike the conventional game which is advantageous to the player when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given an unexpectedness.

Feature A17. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first variable pitching means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric winning prize port 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning hole in the second and third embodiments) 301a) and second variable pitching means (the second electric winning prize port 42 or the third electric winning prize port 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning prize port 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
In the first specific control, an opening / closing operation of the first variable pitching means is performed,
In the second specific control, an opening / closing operation of the second variable pitching means is performed,
The expected degree of entry into the second variable entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entry into the first variable entry means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature A16, wherein:

  According to the feature A17, the expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expectation degree of entering the first variable entry means in the first specifying control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to increase the benefits given to the player. Thus, the state in which the second specific control is being performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being performed.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration of “providing a restricting portion for restricting entrance to the first variable entrance means” is conceivable.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, and the following features H1. You may apply the structure limited in any one of -H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning to the upper working ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) The first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first, the first opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) For executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
Second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third throughgate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operation ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments) The second lottery means (the function for executing the process of S1003 or S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the process of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the execution mode) Function to execute)
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) starts to display the symbol change. , First display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (function for executing the processing from step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments) A function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202),
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit region 72 in the second and third embodiments). 2 result display section 306b) starts the symbol change display, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) A function of executing the processing of step S1204 to step S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments, and
With
The first display control means includes
First period determining means for determining a first change display period, which is a symbol change display period in the first display unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and 1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment),
First period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing processing for updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first variation display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) Tx update function),
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the first display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determining means,
The second display control means includes
Second period determining means for determining a second change display period, which is a symbol change display period in the second display unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S1006 and S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing steps S1806 to S1808 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment),
Second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period (function of executing processing for updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments) A function of updating the second variation display time counter Ty of the MPU 202),
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the second display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determining means,
The second change based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the display of the symbol is displayed on each display unit. While the measurement of the display period is stopped, the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit. A gaming machine comprising measurement stop means (a function of executing a pause process and a variable reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping the measurement of the first change display period based on the above.

  According to the feature B1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbols is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. And when the specific stop result is displayed on the 1st display part or the 2nd display part because the change display period corresponding to each display part passes, the 1st specific control or the 2nd specific control is carried out. Executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed during the display of the symbol change on one display unit can occur, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and improve the interest. Can do.

  In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period related to the other display unit is stopped based on the fact that the specific stop result is displayed on one display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbols is performed on each display unit. . Thereby, as a player, the specific control based on the specific stop result can be executed without worrying about the change display of the symbol on the other display unit. Thereby, it can avoid that a player's attention is distracted during specific control, and the attention degree to specific control can be raised.

Feature B2. The measurement stop unit is configured to display a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. Based on a temporary stop means (function to execute a temporary stop process of the MPU 202) for temporarily stopping the measurement of the first change display period,
Measurement resumption means (function to execute the processing from step S524 to step S526 of the MPU 202) for resuming measurement of the first change display period based on the end of the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature B2, when the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit, the measurement of the first change display period is temporarily stopped, and then the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result is ended. Based on this, measurement of the first change display period is resumed. Thereby, it is possible to use the symbol change display until the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

  Feature B3. When the non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit The game machine according to Feature B2, wherein the measurement of the first change display period is not temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature B3, when a non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the first display unit is performed. Therefore, the first specific control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, attention can be paid to the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, the symbol change display based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the symbol change display based on the lottery by the first lottery means can be noted step by step. Accordingly, the two can be closely associated with each other.

  Feature B4. The period determining means may perform the symbol change display on the second display unit a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein each change display period is determined so as to be possible.

  According to the feature B4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol change display on the second display unit can be performed a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit. Thereby, the state where a series of games based on the lottery by the 2nd lottery means are performed continuously can be created. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied while the lottery by the lottery means and the symbol change display on each display unit are independently performed, a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. As a result, the game can be given unexpectedness.

Feature B5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (second electric winning prize port 42 or third electric winning prize port 43 in the first embodiment, second and third embodiments) The second big prize opening 302a)
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
When the second specific control is executed, the variable entrance control means for executing the variable entrance control that switches the variable entrance means to the closed state after the variable entrance means is in the open state (the MPU 202 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). A function of executing 2 electric combination opening / closing process and 3rd electric combination opening / closing process, a function of performing opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The number of game balls that can be entered into the variable entry means during the second specific control is determined in advance,
Each period determining means, when the specific condition is satisfied, by changing each change display period, the second display unit of the second display unit that can be performed during the change display of the symbol in the first display unit The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the number of symbol change displays can be changed.

  According to the feature B5, when the second specific control is performed, the variable pitch control of the variable pitch means is performed. Thereby, since it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable entry means during the second specific control is determined in advance, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during one second specific control is determined. Thereby, it can suppress that an excessive privilege is provided to a player, and can manage a game easily.

  In such a configuration, since the number of symbol change displays on the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display on the first display unit can be changed, by changing the number of times, The amount of privilege to be granted can be changed. Thereby, the privilege amount provided with respect to a player can be changed, performing management of a game easily.

Feature B6. Based on a third lottery opportunity different from each lottery opportunity, third lottery means (step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing lottery to determine whether or not to execute a third specific control different from the respective specific controls. Function to execute processing)
Based on the lottery by the third lottery means, a third display for starting the change display of symbols on a third display unit different from the respective display units and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means Control means (function to execute the processing from step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
The third display control means includes
Third period determining means for determining a third change display period that is a period of change display of the symbol in the third display unit (function for executing the processing of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
Third period measuring means for measuring the third change display period (function of updating the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the third display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determining means,
The third display control means can start the symbol change display on the third display unit during the symbol change display on the first display unit or the second display unit,
The pause means is
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring unit and Temporarily stopping the measurement of each change display period by the third period measuring means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on each display unit, the first period measuring means and The measurement of each change display period by the second period measuring means is temporarily stopped;
The measurement restarting means restarts the measurement of each change display period that is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

  According to the feature B6, the lottery of the third lottery means and the symbol change display of the third display unit are performed independently of the other lotteries and the symbol change display of the other symbols.

  In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on either the second display unit or the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period in the other display units is temporarily stopped. And based on completion | finish of the specific control which concerns on the said specific stop result, the said measurement is restarted. Thereby, as a player, specific control can be performed without minding the change display of the symbol of another display part. Thereby, the attention degree to specific control can be raised.

  Further, according to the relationship between the symbol change display on the second display unit and the symbol change display on the third display unit, the change display on the other display unit is displayed by displaying the specific stop result on one display unit. The measurement is resumed when the measurement of the period is temporarily stopped and the specific control related to the specific stop result is completed. Thereby, the space | interval of 1 specific control and the following specific control can be made irregular, and the monotonization of a game can be suppressed.

  Feature B7. The measurement stop unit is configured to display a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control on the first display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit. On the basis of the second change display period measurement, the symbol change display of the second display unit is invalidated, and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, further comprising invalidating means for invalidating (a function for executing a variable reset process of the MPU 202).

  According to the feature B7, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the symbol change display performed on the second display unit and the trigger for the change display are displayed. The lottery result of the second lottery means becomes invalid. Thereby, the lottery by the first lottery means and the change display of the symbols in the second display part are performed more independently than the lottery by the second lottery means and the symbol change display in the second display part, while performing the lottery by each lottery means and the display of the symbol change in each display part independently. It is possible to give priority to the symbol change display on the first display section. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a symbol change display on each lottery means and each display unit is performed independently, and the lottery results of these lottery means are related.

Feature B8. Each period determining means includes
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period. Decide
Furthermore, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is likely to be longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which determines a change display period.

  According to feature B8, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, 1st specific control can be performed preferentially rather than 2nd specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the symbol change display on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the first display unit. Thereby, 2nd specific control can be performed preferentially rather than 1st specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be varied according to the first change display period. Therefore, the symbol change display of the first display unit can be closely associated with the gaming state.

  Feature B9. In the case where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is likely to be shorter than when there is no change or the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively long second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, the first change display period is likely to be shorter than the second change display period, and the first specific control can be executed with priority over the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes longer, which may cause a disadvantage that the game does not proceed smoothly. In particular, according to the configuration of the feature B4, since the second specific control can be performed continuously, the above inconvenience is likely to be remarkable.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively short second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed on the first display unit, the first specific control is executed preferentially over the second specific control, and the inconvenience can be avoided. it can.

Feature B10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable entry means (lower operating port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the gaming area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the entrance part,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the variable entry means,
On the basis of the fact that the symbol change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is performed in the first display unit. From a low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, a high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable means is relatively high The gaming machine according to Feature B8 or Feature B9, further comprising means for shifting to the support mode) (a function of executing the processing of Step S2005 and Step S2009 or Step S2006 and Step S2010 in the MPU 202).

  According to the feature B10, the expectation of the entry to the variable entry means is based on the fact that the first display unit displays a change in the pattern corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result. The degree becomes higher. Thereby, since it becomes easy to perform the lottery by the second lottery means, the second specifying control is easily performed in the situation where the symbol change display related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the second specific control in a situation where the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the variable pitch in the open state is used. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation level of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the first display unit indicates the non-winning result. A configuration in which the mode of the variable pitching means is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding thereto is conceivable.

Feature B11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first entrance portion (a first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper operation ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and a second entrance A sphere (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower operation ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the first entrance part,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the second entrance part,
B7 thru | or B7 thru | or characterized by being comprised so that the entrance to the said 1st entrance part may generate | occur | produce when the launch operation is performed aiming at the entrance to the said 2nd entrance part The gaming machine according to any one of B10.

  According to the feature B11, when aiming at the entrance to the second entrance part, the entrance to the first entrance part may naturally occur. Thereby, the act which intentionally generate | occur | produces the entrance to a 2nd entrance part can be suppressed by adjusting the launch aspect of a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally executing the second specific control by preferentially performing the symbol change display of the second display unit over the symbol change display of the first display unit. It is possible to suppress a game that is different from the game being played.

Feature B12. The first and second ball entrance portions are a first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which game balls can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passage and the second passage is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passage can pass through the second passage.
The game ball so that the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second passage without passing through the first passage is smaller than the frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage and passes through the second passage. A gaming machine according to the feature B11, further comprising a flow mode regulation means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow mode of the game.

  According to the feature B12, the game ball easily passes through the second passage after passing through the first passage. Thereby, after the lottery by the 1st lottery means is performed, the lottery by the 2nd lottery means is easy to be performed. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit tends to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the symbol change display on the first display unit ends during the symbol change display on the second display unit.

  Feature B13. It is provided with a regulation means (function to make an affirmative judgment on the process of step S901 or step S1201 of the MPU 202) for regulating the execution of the symbol change display on the second display unit during the first specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12.

  According to the feature B13, since the execution of the symbol change display on the second display unit is restricted during the first specific control, the first specific control can be performed without worrying about the symbol change display on the second display unit. Can be executed. Thereby, it can avoid that a player's attention is distracted.

  Feature B14. When the invalidation means displays a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control in the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed in the second display unit Any one of features B7 to B13, wherein the change display of the symbol in the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are not invalidated. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B14, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means that triggered the change display are displayed. Since it is not invalidated, the second specific control can be executed. Thereby, attention can be paid to the change display of the symbol in the second display unit. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noted step by step. Accordingly, the two can be closely associated with each other.

  Feature B15. The gaming machine according to Feature B14, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

  According to the feature B15, it is assumed that the player plays a game in the hope that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. Thereby, unlike the conventional game which is advantageous to the player when the winning result is obtained, the game can be given an unexpectedness.

Feature B16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
A first variable pitching means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric winning prize port 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning hole in the second and third embodiments) 301a) and second variable pitching means (the second electric winning prize port 42 or the third electric winning prize port 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning prize port 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
In the first specific control, an opening / closing operation of the first variable pitching means is performed,
In the second specific control, an opening / closing operation of the second variable pitching means is performed,
The expected degree of entry to the second variable entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entry to the first variable entry means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature B15, wherein:

  According to the feature B16, the expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the expectation degree of entering the first variable entry means in the first specifying control. Therefore, the second specific control tends to increase the benefits given to the player. Thus, the state in which the second specific control is being performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being performed.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration of “providing a restricting portion for restricting entrance to the first variable entrance means” is conceivable.

Feature B17. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning to the upper working ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) The first lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first, the first opening and closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) For executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
Second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third throughgate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operation ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control different from the first specific control (support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment, second opening and closing in the second and third embodiments) The second lottery means (the function for executing the process of S1003 or S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the process of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the execution mode) Function to execute)
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) starts to display the symbol change. , First display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (function for executing the processing from step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments) A function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202),
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit region 72 in the second and third embodiments). 2 result display section 306b) starts the symbol change display, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (step S905 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) A function of executing the processing of step S1204 to step S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments, and
With
The first display control means includes
First period determining means for determining a first change display period, which is a symbol change display period in the first display unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S606 and S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and 1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment),
First period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing processing for updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first variation display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) Tx update function),
With
When the symbol change display is performed in the first display unit, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determining means,
The first change display based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit. A gaming machine comprising measurement stop means (a function of executing a temporary stop process and a variable reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping the measurement of a period.

  According to the feature B17, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbols is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. And when the specific stop result is displayed on the 1st display part or the 2nd display part because the change display period corresponding to each display part passes, the 1st specific control or the 2nd specific control is carried out. Executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed during the display of the symbol change on one display unit can occur, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and improve the interest. Can do.

  In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period according to the first display unit is stopped based on the fact that the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in the situation where the change display of the symbols is performed on each display unit. . Thereby, as a player, 2nd specific control can be performed, without minding the change display of the symbol in a 1st display part. Thereby, it can avoid that a player's attention is distracted during 2nd specific control, and the attention degree to 2nd specific control can be raised.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, the following features H1 You may apply the structure limited in any one of -H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a function for executing a winning process for through of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function to execute a winning process for the operation opening), and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit (the first electric utility reservation area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Storage ball storage area 321) in the form,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (the function of executing the support lottery process of the first map change start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Function for executing the processing of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the embodiment),
The game state is shifted to a predetermined grant correspondence state based on the grant determination result obtained by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute the first electric utility opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function to shift to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means (steps S505 to S505 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for controlling predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
In gaming machines equipped with
When the winning game times corresponding to the grant correspondence result is performed as the determination result of the grant determining means, the game times control means determines the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state from the end timing of the winning game times ( In the first embodiment, when the period when the first electric accessory 41a is supported, the period during which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments), the next winning game times The game times of
Among the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information reflecting the determination result in the case where the special information related to the next game round is the subject of the grant determination, than when the next game round is started First specifying means for specifying at a previous timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function for executing processing for setting a holding command for the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the specified result by the first specifying means, the granting period after the end of the winning game times and the operation time period for the game times in which the next game times are performed are related to the next game times. A gaming machine comprising an effect execution means for performing a game round effect (a function for executing a normal hold notice effect and a short time normal hold notice effect in the MPU 242).

  According to the feature C1, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state has elapsed after the winning game round ends. Thereby, it can suppress that a new game time is started during a grant corresponding | compatible state, and can suppress that a player's attention is distracted.

  In such a configuration, since the game times effect is executed across the grant corresponding period and the game times operation period, it is possible to secure a period longer than the game times operation period as the effect times of the game times effect. Thereby, the effect which continues over a long period which cannot be set within the operation period for game times can be set as a game time effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game times effect and improve the interest.

  Feature C2. The effect execution means starts a variable display of a pattern on a predetermined display means (display screen G) at least before the start timing of the next game time as the game time effect, and the next game The feature C1 is characterized in that a stop result corresponding to the specified result of the first specifying means is displayed at a timing later than the start timing of the game and before the end timing of the next game time. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C2, the change display of the pattern is performed across the grant corresponding period and the game turn operation period. Thereby, a player can be made to recognize a game turn effect as a series of effects straddling a grant corresponding period and a game turn operation period.

  Feature C3. When the special information related to the next game round is acquired at a timing prior to the end timing of the winning game round, the presentation execution means has the grant corresponding period corresponding to the winning game round. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the gaming times effect is executed based on the start.

  According to the feature C3, when the special information related to the next game round is already acquired at the end timing of the winning game round, the game round effect is executed from the start of the grant corresponding period. Thereby, it is possible to secure the effect period of the game times effect for the period corresponding to the grant.

Feature C4. When the special information related to the next game round is acquired during the grant corresponding period, the game round presentation is finished from the acquisition timing of the special information so that the game round presentation is finished by the end timing of the next game round. Provided with an effect period determining means (a function for executing the process of step S1412 in the MPU 242) for determining an effect period according to the period until the end timing of the grant correspondence period,
When the special information related to the next game round is acquired during the grant-corresponding period, the performance executing means executes the game round effect over the presentation period determined by the presentation period determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3, wherein the gaming machine is a product.

  According to the feature C4, when special information relating to the next game round is acquired during the grant corresponding period, a game round effect is executed. Thereby, since the execution frequency of a game round effect can be raised, the further improvement of the attention degree to the game during a provision corresponding | compatible period can be aimed at.

  In this case, the effect period is set so that the game times effect ends before the end timing of the next game times. Thereby, the game time effect ends at a timing later than the end timing of the next game round, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game time effect affects the next game round effect.

Feature C5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area where the game ball flows down;
Variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (first electric winning prize port 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning hole 301a in the second and third embodiments) When,
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Variable pitch control means for executing variable pitch control to switch the variable pitch means to the open state after the variable pitch means is in the open state (the function of executing the first electric utility opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second And a function of performing opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 301a of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment),
With
The grant-corresponding period is either one in which the variable pitching means is in the open state for a predetermined upper limit period, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable pitching means. A specific game period in which a specific game in which the variable pitch control is continued until the event occurs,
Limiting means for restricting the number of balls entering the variable pitching means so that the number of balls entering the variable pitching means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number (first specific regulation nail in the first embodiment) 64c, the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the regulation nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments is provided.

  According to the feature C5, it is a specific game period in which a specific game is performed based on the end of the winning game times. The specific game ends when an event of either the elapse of the upper limit period or the upper limit number of balls occurs. Thereby, the privilege amount given to a player can be adjusted, and management of a game can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, the number of balls entering the variable pitching means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number. Thereby, the specific game period corresponds to only the upper limit period without depending on the entry timing of the game ball, so that it is possible to easily grasp the effect period of the game round effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a game round effect.

Feature C6. The grant correspondence period differs according to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination in the winning game times,
The effect execution means includes means for determining an effect period of the game times effect corresponding to the grant corresponding period, and executes the game times effect over the effect period determined by the means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein:

  According to the feature C6, the provision correspondence period varies, and the production period can be varied corresponding to the variation. This makes it possible to diversify game times effects.

  According to the relationship with the feature C5, “the number of times that the specific game is performed in the specific game period differs depending on the special information that is the subject of the determination of the grant in the winning game times, The execution means may include a means for determining an effect period of the game times effect corresponding to the number of times ”.

  Feature C7. The winning probability that the determination result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is set higher than the non-win probability that becomes the non-grant correspondence result that the determination result of the grant determination does not correspond to the grant information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein:

  According to the feature C7, since the winning probability is set higher than the non-winning probability, the winning game times are more easily performed than the game times corresponding to the non-giving correspondence results. Thereby, since the grant corresponding period is likely to occur continuously, it is possible to increase the chance of performing the game times effect.

  Feature C8. The game time operation period of the winning game times is set shorter than the game time operation period of the non-winning game times corresponding to the non-granting correspondence result, The game according to the feature C7 Machine.

  When the winning probability is higher than the non-winning probability, the frequency of occurrence of the grant corresponding period is relatively high, and there is a possibility that the game digestion rate is reduced. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the operation time period for winning game times is set to be relatively short, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the rate of game digestion.

  Even in this case, the game times effect can be ensured for the period corresponding to the granting period, so that diversification of the game times effect is ensured.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein an operation period for the game times of the winning game times is set shorter than the grant corresponding period.

  According to the feature C9, since the operation time period for the winning game times is set to be shorter than the grant response period, the degree of freedom of the game times can be reduced while ensuring the degree of freedom in the grant response period. Can do.

  Even in this case, the game times effect can be ensured for the period corresponding to the granting period, so that diversification of the game times effect is ensured.

Feature C10. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a function for executing a winning process for through of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function to execute a winning process for the operation opening), and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit (the first electric utility reservation area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Storage ball storage area 321) in the form,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information (the function of executing the support lottery process of the first map change start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Function for executing the processing of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the embodiment),
The game state is shifted to a predetermined grant correspondence state based on the grant determination result obtained by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute the first electric utility opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function to shift to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means (steps S505 to S505 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for controlling predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments performing display control of the first result display unit 306a),
In gaming machines equipped with
When the winning game times corresponding to the grant correspondence result is performed as the determination result of the grant determining means, the game times control means determines the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state from the end timing of the winning game times ( In the first embodiment, when the period when the first electric accessory 41a is supported, the period during which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments), the next winning game times The game times of
Among the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information reflecting the determination result in the case where the special information related to the next game round is the subject of the grant determination, than when the next game round is started First specifying means for specifying at a previous timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function for executing processing for setting a holding command for the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the result of the specification by the destination specifying means, at the predetermined timing of the grant correspondence period after the end of the winning game round, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the predetermined display means (display screen G), and the grant The determination result of the grant determination for the special information related to the next game time by displaying a stop result corresponding to the specification result of the first specifying means by the end time of the corresponding period or the end time of the next game time A game machine characterized by comprising effect execution means (a function for executing various holding notice effects in the MPU 242) for performing a game time effect for informing the player.

  According to the feature C10, when the winning game round is performed, the next game round is started after the grant correspondence period corresponding to the grant correspondence state has elapsed after the winning game round ends. Thereby, it can suppress that a new game time is started during a grant corresponding | compatible state, and can suppress that a player's attention is distracted.

  In such a configuration, the display of the variation of the pattern is started at a predetermined timing of the grant corresponding period based on the winning game times. The change display is performed until the end timing of the grant corresponding period or the end timing of the next game round. And the determination result of the grant determination about the special information which concerns on the said next game round is alert | reported by displaying a stop result. In this case, since the variation display of the pattern is performed using the grant corresponding period, the variation display of the pattern can be suitably performed even when the operation period for the game rotation is short. Therefore, a game round effect can be performed suitably and an interest improvement can be aimed at.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following feature G1. -G4, You may apply the structure limited in any one of the following characteristics H1-H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (second electric winning combination port 42 and third electric winning combination port 43 in the first embodiment);
Based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the variable entry control means (second electric power in the MPU 202) that executes variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is opened in the predetermined game period. A function for executing a role opening / closing process and a third electric role opening / closing process), and
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The variable entry means includes a first variable entry means (second electric accessory 42a) and a second variable entry means (third electric accessory 43a),
The variable entry control means includes
A selection means (a function for executing the second electric combination opening / closing process or the third electric combination opening / closing process in the MPU 202) for selecting one of the variable entry means that executes the variable entry control during the game period;
When any one of the variable entry means is selected by the selection means, the variable entry means has an expected degree of entry into the variable entry means during the game period. After operating in a relatively low low expectation mode (opening for a short time), so as to operate in a high expectation mode (opening for a long time) with a relatively high expectation level for entering the variable pitching means, A gaming machine comprising: mode determining means (a function for executing a second electric combination opening / closing process and a third electric combination opening / closing process in the MPU 202) for determining an aspect of the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature D1, variable entry control may be performed for the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means during the game period based on a specific opportunity. As a result, it is possible to play a game while predicting which variable entry control will be performed in which variable entry means during the game period, and it is possible to improve the interest through such a novel game, It is not known whether the variable entry control is performed in the variable entry means, the player may be confused and the benefits obtained may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the variable entry means selected by the selection means during the game period operates in the high expectation mode after operating in the low expectation mode. In this case, the player can easily grasp the variable entry control target based on the operation in the low expectation mode, and the game ball can be inserted into the variable entry control target in accordance with the operation in the high expectation mode. Can fire towards the ball means. Thereby, the said inconvenience which may arise by providing two variable pitching means can be avoided.

  In particular, it is assumed that the player pays attention to each variable entry means during the game period. In this regard, according to this feature, the variable pitching means, which is the target of the player's attention, is configured to notify the variable pitch control target, so that the player can more preferably visually recognize the notification. Can do.

  Further, since the mode of the variable pitching means for allowing the player to grasp the variable pitch control target is a low expectation mode, the influence on the pitching rate of the gaming balls during the gaming period is small. Thereby, it is possible to notify the hitting by the variable entry means while suppressing the influence on the entry rate of the game balls during the game period.

Feature D2. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined specific period,
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein a specific period longer than the specific period is provided between the high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect.

  According to the feature D2, since the specific period is set longer than the launch period of the game ball, the game ball is launched at least once during the specific period. Thereby, based on the flow-down mode of the game ball fired during the specific period, it is possible to adjust the game ball launch mode toward the variable ball-throwing means for which the current variable ball-throw control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform game balls in a specific period.

Feature D3. Each of the expectation modes is a long-term mode and a short-term mode in which an open period in which the variable pitching means is in the open state is relatively long and short,
The game period is a predetermined upper limit period, which is a combination of the open period of the short-term mode and the open period of the long-term mode, or the number of game balls entered based on the short-term mode and the long period A specific game in which the variable game control is continued until one of the events occurs, in which the total number of game balls entered based on the period mode is the predetermined upper limit number. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2, which is a game period.

  According to the feature D3, the specific game ends when the period obtained by combining the open periods of both the short-term mode and the long-term mode becomes the upper limit period. In this case, since the mode for notifying the player of the current variable entry control target is the short-term mode, it is possible to ensure a long open period of the long-term mode. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the game by the variable pitching means while ensuring the player's profit.

Feature D4. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined specific period,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein an open period of the short period mode is set shorter than the specific period.

  According to the feature D4, since the open period of the short period mode is shorter than the specific period, even if the game ball is fired after confirming the operation of the short period mode, the game ball is still in the short period mode. It is unlikely to enter the variable entry means. Thereby, the fall of the entrance rate in the specific game resulting from performing a short-term aspect can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of the player's profit that may be caused by notifying the game by the variable pitching means.

Feature D5. A launch operation means (launch handle 29) operated by the player to perform the launch operation is provided, and a game ball is directed from the launch means toward the game area based on the launch operation performed on the launch operation means. Is a fired configuration,
The launching means launches a game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. In addition, when the game ball is fired based on the second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, the second position different from the first position in the game area. A game ball is launched toward the position,
A variable input with a high expectation of entering a game ball when the launching means is launched toward the first position and when a game ball is launched toward the second position by the launching means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the position of each of the variable ball entry means in the game area is set so that the ball means are different.

  According to the feature D5, in order to obtain more benefits, when aiming for a game ball to enter the first variable entry means and when aiming for a game ball to enter the second variable entry means Therefore, it is necessary to change the mode of the firing operation with respect to the firing operation means. For this reason, the player's attention can be more attracted to which variable entry means is used for the variable entry control.

Feature D6. First lottery means (function to execute the process of step S603 of the MPU 202) for performing lottery to determine whether or not to perform the variable pitch control based on a first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51);
Second lottery means for performing lottery to determine whether or not to perform the variable pitch control based on a second lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53) different from the first lottery opportunity. (The function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202);
With
The variable pitch control means performs the variable pitch control on the first variable pitch means when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable pitch control. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable pitch control, the variable pitch control is performed with respect to the second variable pitch means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

  According to the feature D6, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently. Thereby, a player can be made to confirm the state of the lottery by two lottery means simultaneously.

  In this case, depending on each lottery means, the variable entry control target to be controlled when the lottery result of each lottery means is the winning result is different. Thereby, it is possible to grasp which lottery means is used for variable pitch control. On the other hand, since the two lottery means are performed independently, it may be difficult to grasp which variable entry means is the variable entry control target.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may occur when the two lottery means are performed independently.

Feature D7. Based on the lottery performed by the first lottery means, the first display for starting the symbol change display on the first display unit (first unit region 71) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function of executing the processing of step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery performed by the second lottery means, a change display of symbols is started on a second display unit (second unit region 72 or third unit region 73) different from the first display unit, and the second lottery unit Second display control means (a function for executing the processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202) for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of
With
Each of the display control means is
When the symbol change display is performed, a period determining means for determining a change display period in which the symbol change display is performed (function of executing the second general diagram variation start process and the third general diagram variation start process of the MPU 202). )When,
Period measuring means for measuring the change display period (function of updating the second timer counter T2 and the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202);
With
In each of the display units, the symbol change display is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determining means,
The variable entry control means is configured to display the first variable entry based on the fact that a specific stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being the winning result is displayed on the first display unit. And the second variable entry means is controlled based on the fact that a specific stop result corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the second lottery means is the winning result is displayed on the second display unit. Is what
Each change display period is set to one of a plurality of periods having different periods,
When the specific stop result is displayed on one display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on each display unit, the measurement of the change display period corresponding to the other display unit is temporarily stopped. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, further comprising temporary stopping means (a function of executing a temporary stop process in the MPU 202).

  According to the feature D7, the change display timing of the symbols of each display unit is different, and each change display period varies, so it becomes difficult to understand which variable entry means is subjected to the variable entry control. Yes. Thereby, it is difficult to grasp which variable entry means performs variable entry control at a timing before the start timing of the variable entry control. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while predicting which variable entry means performs variable entry control. On the other hand, it may be difficult to grasp which variable entry means is a variable entry control target, and the player may be confused and the benefits obtained may be reduced.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to provide a game that predicts a variable entry control target while reducing a decrease in entry rate.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following feature G1. -G4, You may apply the structure limited in any one of the following characteristics H1-H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (function for executing step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition response result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (first A function of executing outlier fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing outlier fluctuation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
In gaming machines equipped with
Measuring means for measuring a predetermined advantageous time based on the advantageous state (function for updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, first fluctuation of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function of updating the display time counter Tx),
An advantageous state ending unit (a function of executing the processing of step S510 and step S511 of the MPU 202) for ending the advantageous state when the measuring unit measures that the advantageous time has elapsed;
Measurement time notification control means (a function for displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242) for notifying the time information corresponding to the measurement result by the measurement means by the notification means (symbol display device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it becomes an advantageous state based on the determination result of the shift determination means being the shift response result. The advantageous state continues until the advantageous time has elapsed.

  In such a configuration, time information corresponding to the measurement result of the advantageous time is notified by the notification means. Thereby, in the advantageous state, it is possible to grasp the mode of the advantageous time that is directly linked to the player's profit, so the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved. .

Feature E2. The notification means is a display means capable of displaying time,
The measurement time notification control means causes the display means to display the remaining advantageous time until the advantageous time elapses in the advantageous state, based on the measurement result by the measuring means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E2, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the remaining advantageous time can be easily grasped.

Feature E3. A temporary stop means (a function of executing a temporary stop process of the MPU 202) for temporarily stopping the measurement of the advantageous time by the measurement means when a predetermined temporary stop condition is satisfied;
A measurement resuming unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) for resuming the measurement of the advantageous time by the measuring unit when a predetermined resumption condition is satisfied;
With
When the measurement by the measurement unit is temporarily stopped, the measurement time notification control unit temporarily stops notification of time information until the measurement by the measurement unit is resumed. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

  According to the feature E3, when the temporary stop condition is satisfied, the measurement by the measuring unit is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop is maintained until the restart condition is satisfied. In this case, the notification of the time information by the notification means is also stopped in synchronization with the temporary stop. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the measurement result by the measurement unit and the notification of time information in a situation where the measurement by the measurement unit is temporarily stopped.

Feature E4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state (the second electric winning award port 42 or the third electric winning award port 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) The second big prize opening 302a)
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Opening / closing control means for controlling the variable pitching means so that the variable pitching means opens / closes in a predetermined operation mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (second electric utility opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) And a function of executing the third electric role opening / closing process, a function of performing opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The advantageous state is a state in which the frequency of occurrence of the specific opportunity is relatively high,
The temporary stop condition is that the opening / closing operation is started in the variable pitching means,
The game machine according to Feature E3, wherein the restart condition is that the opening / closing operation in the variable pitching means is terminated.

  According to the feature E4, the variable pitching means is opened and closed in the advantageous state. Thereby, since it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, a privilege is easily given to the player, and it can be said that the player is in an advantageous state.

  In such a configuration, the measurement of the advantageous time is temporarily stopped while the variable pitching means is performing the opening / closing operation. Thereby, since the opening / closing operation of the variable pitching means and the update of the advantageous time do not occur simultaneously, it is possible to suppress the distraction of the player's attention.

  Feature E5. When it is measured by the measuring means that the advantageous time has elapsed, it is determined whether a predetermined extension condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the extension condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising: extension means (a function of executing a handling process during an out-of-display display of the MPU 202) for extending the advantageous state by a predetermined extension time.

  According to the feature E5, when the extension condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is extended for a predetermined time. Accordingly, the advantage state continues despite the fact that the advantage time has been informed by the notification means, so that it is possible to give unexpectedness to the player and whether or not the extension condition is satisfied. You can have an advantageous time while you are interested in.

Feature E6. The game turn operation is started on the basis of the transfer determination made by the transfer determination means, and the game turn operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination means. The predetermined notification means (the first unit region 71, the second and the third in the first embodiment) so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed according to the determination result of the transition determination means. Game time control means for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment (function to execute the processing of step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the advantageous time is a time during which a winning game round corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination being the shift response result is performed.

  According to the feature E6, since the advantageous time is a time when the winning game times are performed, it is possible to provide a game in which the game times and the advantageous state are integrated. Thereby, interest improvement can be aimed at.

Feature E7. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a function for executing a winning process for through of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function to execute a winning process for the operation opening), and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit (the first electric utility reservation area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Storage ball storage area 321) in the form,
With
The transition determination unit determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and includes a plurality of acquisition information storage units. When special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information.
The game time control means determines a game time operation time, which is a time during which the game time is performed, based on the special information determined by the transition determination means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the first special figure variation start process of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game time is performed, the game times determined by the time determination means The game operation is performed in an operation mode corresponding to the operation time,
Information on the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, and the game times when the game times related to the predetermined special information are performed Prior identification means for identifying information on the operation time at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are performed (the function of acquiring the variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for the pending notice of the MPU 202 and the variation) Equipped with a function to grasp the variable display time based on the type counter CS)
In the situation where the predetermined winning game number is started, the measurement time notification control unit is specified by the destination specifying unit that the next game time is the winning game time with respect to the predetermined winning game number. In the case, the time information corresponding to the time obtained by adding the game time operation time related to the winning game time on the rear side to the game time operation time related to the winning game time is notified. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein:

  According to the feature E7, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the game time operation time related to the rear winning game times is added to the game time operating time related to the front winning game times. Information corresponding to the specified time is notified. This allows the player to recognize two advantageous states as one advantageous state having a long advantageous time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games in the advantageous state, and to improve the entertainment more suitably.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1. -G4, You may apply the structure limited in any one of the following characteristics H1-H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (function for executing step S603 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third The function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment),
Setting means (first setting) for setting the gaming state to the advantageous state based on the determination result of the transition determining means being a transition correspondence result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player A function of executing outlier fluctuation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing outlier fluctuation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
In gaming machines equipped with
Based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a bonus to a player (function to execute the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second And the function of executing the processing of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment),
When a lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to granting a privilege, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (the payout control device 117 controls the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command). Function)
With
The advantageous state is a state where the lottery by the lottery means can be repeated a plurality of times,
Fluctuating means for varying the duration of the advantageous state (function to execute the process of step S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function to execute the process of step S1708 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature F1, it becomes an advantageous state based on the determination result of the shift determination means being the shift response result. During the advantageous state, a lottery may be performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning result, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, since the lottery of the lottery means can be repeatedly performed in the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player performs more lotteries by the lottery means during the advantageous state. Thereby, the attention degree to the game in an advantageous state can be raised and an interest improvement can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, the number of times the lottery performs the lottery varies as the duration of the advantageous state varies. Thereby, the privilege given to the player in one advantageous state varies due to the variation in the duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of attention to the duration of the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved more suitably.

Feature F2. Measuring means for measuring the duration of the advantageous state (function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of updating the first variable display time counter Tx of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) )When,
Based on the lottery performed by the lottery means, the change of the symbol in a predetermined display section (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second result display section 306b in the second and third embodiments). Display control for starting each display and performing each unit game in accordance with the lottery of the lottery means by displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means when a predetermined change display period has elapsed Means (function to execute the processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function to perform display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
With
When the winning unit game corresponding to the winning result is performed as the lottery result of the lottery means, the display control means is a grant corresponding period for giving a privilege to the player from the end timing of the unit game ( When the support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) has passed, the next unit for the winning unit game To start a game,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising: a pause unit (a function for executing a pause process in the MPU 202) that pauses measurement by the measurement unit during the granting period.

  According to the feature F2, the measurement of the continuous period of the advantageous state is temporarily stopped during the grant response period. Thereby, it is not necessary to set the continuation period and the change display period of the advantageous state in consideration of the grant correspondence period. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the duration of the advantageous state and the change display period.

Feature F3. The game turn operation is started on the basis of the transfer determination made by the transfer determination means, and the game turn operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination means. The predetermined notification means (the first unit region 71, the second and the third in the first embodiment) so that the operation for the game times of each game time is performed according to the determination result of the transition determination means. Game time control means for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment (function to execute the processing of step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202),
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the continuation period of the advantageous state is a period in which a winning game round corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result is performed.

  According to the feature F3, since the continuation period of the advantageous state is a period in which the winning game times are performed, it is possible to provide a game integrated with the game times and the advantageous state. Thereby, interest improvement can be aimed at.

Feature F4. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a function for executing a winning process for through of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function to execute a winning process for the operation opening), and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit (the first electric utility reservation area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) Storage ball storage area 321) in the form,
With
The transition determination unit determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and includes a plurality of acquisition information storage units. When special information is stored, the transition determination is sequentially performed for the plurality of special information.
The game time control means determines a game time operation period that is a time period during which the game time is performed based on the special information determined by the transition determination means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the first special figure variation start process of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game is performed, the game times determined by the period determining means The game operation is performed in an operation mode corresponding to the operation period,
Information on the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, and the game times when the game times related to the predetermined special information are performed Prior identification means for identifying information on the operation period at a timing before the game times related to the predetermined special information are performed (the function of acquiring the variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for the hold notice of the MPU 202 and the variation) Function to grasp the variable display time based on the type counter CS),
In a situation where the predetermined winning game times are started, when the next specifying means specifies that the next game time is the winning game times with respect to the predetermined winning game times, Informing means (symbol display device 81) informs information corresponding to a period obtained by adding the game time operation period related to the winning game times to the game time operation period related to the winning game times. Means (function of displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242);
The gaming machine according to Feature F3, comprising:

  According to the feature F4, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the operation time period for the game times related to the winning game times on the rear side is added to the action time period for the game times related to the front side winning game times. Information corresponding to the selected period is notified. This allows the player to recognize two advantageous states as one advantageous state having a long duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games in the advantageous state, and to improve the entertainment more suitably.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features F1 to F4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, the following feature G1 -G4, You may apply the structure limited in any one of the following characteristics H1-H4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the gaming area and through which a game ball can pass;
First specific control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for executing predetermined first specific control based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage unit;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second passage part, second specific control execution means for executing second specific control that is the same type of specific control as the first specific control (in step S207 to step S209 in the MPU 202). Function to execute processing)
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passage and the second passage is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passage can pass through the second passage.
The game ball so that the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second passage without passing through the first passage is smaller than the frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage and passes through the second passage. A gaming machine comprising a flow mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow mode of the game.

  According to the characteristic G1, the 1st passage part and the 2nd passage part are provided, and each specific control is performed independently by passing these. Thereby, compared with the structure where one specific control is performed, the diversification of a game can be aimed at and an interest improvement can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, each specific control can occur simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest more suitably.

  In this case, since the frequency of passing the second passing part without passing through the first passing part is set to be smaller than the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing part via the first passing part, A situation where only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously.

Feature G2. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the gaming area and through which a game ball can pass;
First lottery means (a function for executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for performing lottery on whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the passing of the game ball through the first passage portion. ,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second passage part, second lottery means (steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) performs lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second specific control different from the first specific control. Function to execute the process of
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passage and the second passage is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passage can pass through the second passage.
The game ball so that the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second passage without passing through the first passage is smaller than the frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage and passes through the second passage. A gaming machine comprising a flow mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow mode of the game.

  According to the feature G2, the 1st passage part and the 2nd passage part are provided, and the lottery by each lottery means is performed independently by passing these. Thereby, compared with the structure where 1 lottery is performed, the diversification of a game can be aimed at and an interest improvement can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passage part can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage part, lottery by each lottery means can occur simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game in which each lottery is actively generated at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest more suitably.

  In this case, since the frequency of passing the second passing part without passing through the first passing part is set smaller than the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing part via the first passing part, the second lottery It is possible to avoid a situation in which only lottery by means is performed. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which lottery by each lottery means is actively generated simultaneously.

Feature G3. Based on the lottery performed by the first lottery means, the first display for starting the symbol change display on the first display unit (first unit region 71) and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (function of executing the processing of step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery performed by the second lottery means, a change display of symbols is started on a second display unit (second unit region 72 or third unit region 73) different from the first display unit, and the second lottery unit Second display control means (a function for executing the processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202) for displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the display of the symbol change on one of the display units,
When a specific stop result corresponding to execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second display unit Including the invalidation means for invalidating the change display of the symbol and the lottery result triggered by the change display (function to execute the variable reset process of the MPU 202),
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol change display period of the first display unit is the symbol change display of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, which is likely to be shorter than the period.

  According to the feature G3, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are independently executed based on the game ball passing through the first passage part or the second passage part. And based on these lotteries, when the change display of a symbol is independently performed in the 1st display part and the 2nd display part, and a specific stop result is displayed on the 1st display part or the 2nd display part, The first specific control or the second specific control is executed. As a result, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed can occur during the display of the change of the symbol on one display unit, so that it is possible to provide a novel game and the degree of attention to the game Can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the symbol change display performed on the second display unit and the lottery that triggered the change display The result is invalidated. This makes it possible to provide a novel game in which two specific controls are related.

  Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the change display period of the first display unit tends to be shorter than the change display period of the second display unit. Since the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion is the timing before the passage through the second passage portion, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display portion is that on the second display portion. It is easy to come before the timing. Thereby, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit is likely to end earlier than the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the first specific control is more likely to be executed preferentially than the second specific control while performing the change display of the symbols on each display unit independently.

Feature G4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the gaming area and through which a game ball can pass;
First specific control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for executing predetermined first specific control based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage unit;
Second specific control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) that executes predetermined second specific control based on the game ball passing through the second passing portion; ,
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passage and the second passage is set so that the game ball that has passed through the first passage can pass through the second passage.
The game ball so that the frequency at which the game ball passes through the second passage without passing through the first passage is smaller than the frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage and passes through the second passage. A gaming machine comprising a flow mode regulating means (regulation nail 64b) for regulating the flow mode of the game.

  According to the characteristic G4, the 1st passage part and the 2nd passage part are provided, and each specific control is performed independently by passing these. Thereby, compared with the structure where one specific control is performed, the diversification of a game can be aimed at and an interest improvement can be aimed at.

  In such a configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, each specific control can occur simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest more suitably.

  In this case, since the frequency of passing the second passing part without passing through the first passing part is set to be smaller than the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing part via the first passing part, A situation where only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the features F1. -F4 and the structure limited by any one of the following features H1-H4 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A game ball enters a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area (first electric winning prize port 41 in the first embodiment, upper operation ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments). Based on the lottery means (first implementation) for performing a lottery of whether or not to generate a specific state (support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments). A function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state, the specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (the first electric combination opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) , A function of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific state, the advantageous state transition means (first implementation) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state The MPU 202 of the embodiment has a function of executing the deviation variation display of the first unit region 71 and the function of executing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a in the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result, the state shifts to a specific state. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state. As a result, the advantage is opposite to that of the normal game mode, so that unexpectedness can be given in the game and a novel game can be provided. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature H2. A first variable pitching means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (first electric winning prize port 41 in the first embodiment, first big winning hole in the second and third embodiments) 301a)
Second variable entry means provided in the game area and having a higher expectation for a game ball to enter than the first variable entry means when the same opening / closing operation as the first variable entry means is performed. (The second electric winning prize opening 42 or the third electric winning prize winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second big winning prize opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function for controlling the payout device 116 on the basis of a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) to give a privilege based on the game ball entering each of the variable ball entry means;
Variable entry control that includes selection means for selecting either or both of the variable entry means, and that switches the entry to the closed state after the variable entry means selected by the selection means is in the open state. Variable entry control means to be executed (function of executing the second electric combination opening / closing process and the third electric combination opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second big winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments) Open / close control function),
With
In the specific state, the variable entry control is set to be performed more easily with respect to the first variable entry means than the second variable entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein in the advantageous state, the variable entry control is set to be performed more easily for the second variable entry means than for the first variable entry means.

  According to the feature H2, in the advantageous state, the variable entry control is performed on the second variable entry means provided separately from the first variable entry means. The expectation for entering the second variable entry means is higher than the expectation for entering the first variable entry means. Thereby, the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player than the specific state.

  In particular, by providing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means separately, the advantageous state and the specific state can be clearly distinguished. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp which state the player is in.

  Feature H3. Regulating means (first specifying in the first embodiment) that is provided in the game area and restricts the entry of the game ball into the first variable entry means regardless of the opening / closing operation of the first variable entry means. A gaming machine according to Feature H2, comprising a regulation nail 64c and a regulation nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

  According to the feature H3, the entry into the first variable entry means is physically restricted by the restriction means. This makes it possible to vary the expected degree of entry into each variable entry means without complicating the open / close operation mode of each variable entry means. Therefore, the effect of the feature H2 can be obtained with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration in which the configuration relating to the setting of the opening / closing operation mode of each variable entry means is provided.

Feature H4. The lottery means is a first lottery means for performing a lottery on whether to generate the specific state based on a first lottery opportunity,
Second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third throughgate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operation ports 304, 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the grant correspondence state in which the grant correspondence game for giving a privilege to the player is performed (support of the second electric combination 42a or the third electric combination 43a in the first embodiment, second and third Second lottery means for performing lottery to determine whether or not to generate the second opening / closing execution mode in the embodiment (function for executing the process of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, second and third embodiments) The function of executing the process of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in FIG.
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) starts to display the symbol change. , First display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (function for executing the processing from step S505 to step S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, in the second and third embodiments) A function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202),
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display unit different from the first display unit (the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 in the first embodiment, the second unit region 72 in the second and third embodiments). 2 result display section 306b) starts the symbol change display, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (step S904 to step S914 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment) A function of executing the processing of step S1204 to step S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments, and
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the display of the symbol change on one of the display units,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, a line is displayed on the second display unit. The above-described symbol change display and invalidation means for invalidating the lottery result triggered by the change display (function to execute the variable reset processing of the MPU 202)
The symbol change display period of the first display unit when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result is set to be shorter than the symbol change display period of the second display unit. And
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the non-winning result, the advantageous state transition unit is configured to display the first display unit over a period longer than the symbol change display period of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, further comprising means for facilitating display of the symbol change.

  According to the feature H4, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbols is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. And when a specific stop result is displayed on the 1st display part or the 2nd display part, it shifts to a specific state or a grant correspondence state. As a result, an event that shifts to a specific state or an assigned correspondence state may occur during the change display of the symbol on one display unit, so it becomes possible to provide a novel game and increase the degree of attention to the game. it can.

  In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit is likely to end at a timing before the end timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. . Thereby, the gaming state is more likely to be in a specific state than the grant correspondence state.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the symbol change display on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the first display unit. As a result, the gaming state is more likely to be in the granting corresponding state than the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features H1 to H4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the features F1. -F4, You may apply the structure limited in any one of the said characteristics G1-G4. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball | bowl launching mechanism, 33 ... Game board, 41-43 ... Electric prize winning opening, 41a-43a ... Electric character, 51-53 ... Through gate, 62 ... Display part for character, 64b ... restriction nail, 64c ... first specific restriction nail, 64d ... second specific restriction nail, 64e ... percussion guiding nail, 71-73 ... unit region, 81 ... design display device, 101 ... main control device, 102 ... sound emission control Device: 202 ... MPU of main control device 101, 242 ... MPU of sound emission control device 102, 300 ... Game board in the second embodiment, 301 ... First variable winning device, 302 ... Second variable winning device, 303 ... Top Operation port 304 ... Lower operation port 306 ... Main display unit 306a ... First result display unit 306b ... Second result display unit 400 ... Game board in the third embodiment 401 ... Upper operation port 402 ... Lower Working port, 02a ... electric auditors products, 403 ... through the gate, 404 ... character object display unit.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first variable pitching means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Based on the first specific opportunity predetermined before Symbol first variable ball entrance control means for executing a first variable ball entrance control for switching the first variable ball entrance unit to the closed state after said open state,
First privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable pitching means;
A second variable entry means provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
On the basis of a predetermined second specific trigger, second variable entry control means for executing second variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the second variable entry means is in the open state;
Second privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on a game ball entering the second variable pitching means;
In the gaming machine, which is equipped with a,
Before Symbol first variable ball entrance control means
As the predetermined first variable entry control, the first variable entry means is controlled to operate in a low expectation mode in which the expectation degree of entering the first variable entry means is relatively low. First control means;
As the predetermined first variable entry control, the first variable entry means is operated in a high expectation mode in which the expectation degree of entering the first variable entry means is relatively high. Second control means that can be controlled in a period after the period in which the operation of the low expectation mode is performed by the first control means;
With
The second variable entry control means includes
As the predetermined second variable entry control, the second variable entry means is controlled so as to operate in a low expectation mode where the expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means is relatively low. Third control means;
As the predetermined second variable entry control, the second variable entry means is operated in a high expectation mode in which an expectation degree of entering the second variable entry means is relatively high. A fourth control means capable of controlling in a period later than a period in which the operation of the low expectation mode is performed by the third control means;
First notification means capable of performing notification corresponding to execution of the first variable entry control;
Second notification means capable of performing notification corresponding to execution of the second variable entry control;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images